You are on page 1of 350

NASA SP-201

CASE FI LE
COPY

ANALYSIS OF

PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS


NASA SP-201

ANALYSIS OF

PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

COMPILED BY

NASA MANNED SPACECRAFT CENTER

Scientific and Technical Information Division


OFFICE OF TECHNOLOGY UTILIZATION 1969
NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMINISTRATION
Washington, D.C.
For Sale by the Superintendent of Documents,
U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402
Price $4.25
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number 71-601481
Contents
[lag[*

I NTRODUCTION .............................................................. VII

Richard J. Allenby
ACKNOWI,EDC, M ENTS ........................................................ IX

CIIAPTEI_ 1. VISUAL ()BSI_:I_VATIONS ....................................... l


Witlia,l A. Anders, James A. LoveU, and Frank Borman
Introduction ................................................................
Color ......................................................................
Surface Textures ............................................................
Mare Areas .............................................................
IIighland Areas .........................................................
Slopes ..................................................................
Ray Patterns ...........................................................
Probable Impact Fe,tt, ures ...................................................
Small Bright IIalo Craters ...............................................
Large hnpact Cr, tters ....................................................
l_robable Vnlc'_nic Features ...................................................
Regional Features .......................................................
D,Lrk Craters ...........................................................
Possible L.tva Tubes .....................................................
Regional Faulting .......................................................
General Lunar Visibilit) .......................................................
Terminator. ............................................................
Zero-Phase Angle ........................................................
Subsolar Are,t ....... ....................................................
Earthshine ..................................................................
Astronomical Observations ....................................................
Solar Coron._ ............................................................
Dim-Light Phenonmna ...................................................
Terrestrial Obserw_tions ..................................................
CIIAPTER 2. INITIAL I*HOTOGRAPItIC ANALYSIS ..........................
Areal Coverage ..............................................................
James H. Sasser and F. EI-Baz
Comparison With Lun't III Photographs .......................................
E. A. Whitaker
Discussion of Named Features ................................................ II

E. A. Whitaker
11
Provisionally Approved Nomenclature .....................................
12
Proposed Nomenclature ..................................................
12
Geology ....................................................................
12
Preliminary Comparison of Apollo 8 and Lunar Orbiter Photography. .........
Robert G. Strom
Introduction ........................................................ 12

Resolution .......................................................... 12
13
lIigh-Illumination Photography .......................................
15
Terminator Photography. ............................................
16
Summary ...........................................................
16
Preliminary Interpretations of Lunar Geology. ..............................
D. E. Wilhelms, D. E. Stuart-Alexander, and K. A. Howard
lfi
Lunar Far Side ......................................................
Lunar Near Side ....................................................

111
iv CONTENTS

Page

Craters ................................................................. 21
Crater Characteristics ................................................ 21
F. EI-Baz

Introduction .................................................... 2 l
Crater Interiors ................................................. 22
Crater Rays .................................................... 23
Blocks ......................................................... 23
Crater Chains ................................................... 25
Rayed Craters and Bright-Halo Craters ................................ 29
Newell J. Trask and Gordon A. Swann
Itypersonic Gas Flow ................................................ 3[)
J. A. O'Keefe, W. S. Cameron, and Harold Masursky
Possible Volcanic Features ................................................ 32
Landforms .......................................................... 32
F. El-Baz and H. G. Wilshire

Sublimates .......................................................... 34
E. A. Whitaker
Colorimetry. 35
General Statement--The Color of the Moon ................................ 35
E. A. Whitaker and A. F. H. Goetz
Apollo 8 Color Experiment ............................................... 36
A. F. H. Goetz
Introduction ........................................................ 36
The Experiment ..................................................... 36
Data Return ........................................................ 36
Image Processing .................................................... 36
Photometry ................................................................. 38
An Investigation of the Lunar Heiligenschein ................................ :18
E. A. Whitaker
Theoretical Photometry .................................................. 41)
H. A. Pohn, R. L. Wildey, and H. W. Rodin
Introduction ........................................................ 40
Significance of Photography ........................................... 40
Advantages of Apollo 8 Photographs Over Earlier Data .................. 40
Preliminary Results .................................................. 41
Photometric Function Reductions ......................................... 41
James L. Dragg and Harold L. Prior
Visibility and Apollo 8 Photographic Results ................................ 44
K. Ziedman
Introduction ........................................................ 44
Summary of Results ................................................. 44
Discussion .......................................................... 48
Comparison of Orbital and LM-Descent Viewing Conditions .......... 48
Shadow Visibility and Visual Dynamic Range ....................... 49
Lunar Surface Simulation ............................................. 51
Evaluation of Photoclinometric Profile Derivation ........................... 51
B. K. Lucchitta and N. A. Gambell
Origin of the Study .................................................. 51
Procedure .......................................................... 52
Geometric and Film Parameters ................................... 52
Format and Microdensitometer Parameters ......................... 52
Selection of Photograph .......................................... 52
Obtaining Parameters ............................................ 52
Scanning of the Area and Computer Program Modification ........... 53
Results ............................................................. 53
Comparison With Photogrammetrie Profiles Obtained From the AP/C
Plotter ....................................................... 53
Comparison of Slopes From Lunar Orbiter Frame H-33, Framelet 739,
With Slopes From Apollo 8 Frame 2082-D ....................... 55
CONTENTS V

Page

Evaluation ..................................................... _)_)


Vertical Resolution of Slope Profiles ............................... 59
Applications of Photoclinometry. ...................................... 59
Advantages of Apollo 8 Photography. .................................. 59
Selenodesy and Cartography .................................................. 59
Evaluation of the Photograph),. ........................................... 59
D. W. G. Arthur
Apollo 8 Control Points .................................................. 5('}
Richard L. Nance
The Figure of the Moon .................................................. 63
W. H. Michael, Jr.
64
Photogrammetry ............................................................
Photogrammetric Data Reduction ......................................... 64
Paul E. Norman, Merritt J. Bender, and R. D. Esten
Introduction ........................................................ 64
Photogrammetric Evaluation of Photography ........................... 64
Camera Calibration Data ............................................. 65
Analytical Aerial Triangulation ........................................ 65
Topographic Mapping ................................................ 67
Photogrammetry of Apollo 8 Photography .................................. 68
Sherman S. C. Wu
Introduction ........................................................ 68
Preliminary Photogrammetric Evaluation ............................... 69
Model of Vertical Photography (Magazine D) ....................... 69
Model of Convergent Photography (Magazine C) .................... 7"_
Comparison Between Photogrammetric and Photoclinometric Profiles.. 75
77
Discussion ..........................................................
Camera Calibration .............................................. 77
Establishment of Control Points ................................... 77
Absolute Orientation of a Model of Vertical Photography With the
Tracking Data (Speed and Time Interval) ........................ 78
Simulation of Lunar Module Photography and Lunar Module Landing Conditions•. • 78

D. D. Lloyd 78
Experiment Operation ....................................................
Hardware and Image Motion Compensation Considerations ................... 79
Hardware Limitations of Light-Collecting Capability ..................... 79
Derivation of IMC: Requirements ..................................... 79
Techniques for Providing the Required Geometric Instructions ................ 80
81
Measurement of Residual Smear ...........................................
81
Method ............................................................
Measurement Data Obtained ......................................... 81
81
Results .............................................................
81
Summary ................................................................... 82
References ..................................................................
CHAPTER 3. ASTRONOMICAL AND EARTH OBSERVATIONS ............... 85
_5
Astronomical Observations ....................................................
L. Dunkelman and Robert O. Hill
Astronomical Moonwatch During Apollo 8 ...................................... 85

William B. Chapman
Preliminary Results of Apollo 8 Optical Tracking Experiment ..................... 86

Harold B. Liemohn _6
Introduction ............................................... 86
Participants ............................................................ 86
Sightings .............................................................. 88
Unconfirmed Interpretation .............................................. 88
Discussion of Photographs ............................................... 91
Conclusions ............................................................ 92
Smithsonian Observations of Apollo 8 Near Earth ...............................
Staff, Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory, and Otha H. Vaughan, Jr.
vi CONTENTS

Page
Introduction ......................................................... 92
The Baker-Nunn Camera ................................................. 92
The Observations ........................................................ 93
Mission Events Related to Mount tfaleakala Photography ................ 93
Mission Events Related to the San Fernando, Spain, Photographs ......... 95
Data ................................................................... 96
Discussion ............................................................. 101
References .................................................................. 102
CHAPTER 4. BACKGROUND ................................................ 103
Introduction ................................................................ 103
Richard J. Allenby
Photographic Objectives ...................................................... 104
Robert O. Hill and Lewis C. Wade
Notes on Film Selection and Use .............................................. 106
James L. Dragg and Robert O. Hill
Use of Type 2485 Film ....................................................... 107
L. Dunkelman and Robert O. Hill
Calibration Information ..................................................... 107
James L. Dragg and Alan Wells
Introduction .......................................................... 107

Specifications and Tolerances ............................................. 107


Measurements From a Typical Lens ....................................... 108
Spectral Transmittance of the Lens ._Window Combination .................... lIl
Fihn Sensitometric Calibration ............................................ 112
James L. Drag9
Camera Exposure Calculations ............................................... ll4
George R. Blackman
Exposure Evaluations .................................................... I l_
James L. Dragg and Harold L. Prior
Magazine C ......................................................... 118
Magazine D ........................................................ 119
Magazine E ....................................................... 12(}
Apollo Camera Resolution Tests ........................................... 120
A. F. H. Goetz
Processing of Apollo 8 Onboard Film ........................................... 122
Richard W. Underwood
Introduction ............................................................ 122
SO-368 Processing ...................................................... 123
SO-168 Processing ....................................................... 123
SO-121 Processing ...................................................... 124
Type 3400 Processing .................................................... 125
Type 2485 Processing ................................................... 125
Stereoscopic Strip Photography ............................................... 126
Paul E. Norman. Robert O. Hill, and Lewis C. Wade
Photographic Targets of Opportunity ........................................ 127
Lewis C. Wade
APPENDIX A--DATA AVAILABILITY ......................................... 129
APPENDIX B--GLOSSARY OF TERMS ........................................ 335
APPENDIX C--AUT_t()R AFFILIATION ....................................... 337
Introduction

RICHARD J. ALLENBY

Apollo 8 was launched from Cape Kennedy, Fla., at 7:50 a.m., e.s.t., on
December 21, 1968. Two hours 50 minutes later, translunar injection was per-
formed; and astronauts Col. Frank Borman, the commander; Capt. James A.
Lovell, Jr., the command module pilot; and Maj. (now Lt. Col.) William A.
Anders, the lunar module pilot, were on their way to the Moon. The spacecraft
was placed in an elliptical lunar orbit at 69 hours 8 minutes after liftoff. After
flying two elliptical orbits of 168.5 by 60 nautical miles with an inclination of
12 ° to the Equator, the spacecraft was placed in a nearly circular orbit of 59.7
by 60.7 nautical miles, in which it remained for eight orbits. At 89 hours 19
minutes, transearth injection was performed from behind the Moon. A nearly
flawless mission was completed on the morning of December 27 when splashdown
occurred in the Pacific Ocean after a total elapsed time of 147 hours.
Lt. Gen. Sam C. Phillips, the Director of the Apollo Program, announced
that such a mission was being considered at a press conference on August 19,
1968. Formal announcement that NASA was preparing Apollo 8 for an orbital
flight around the Moon was released to the press on November 12, 1968.
The primary purpose of this mission was to further progress toward the goal
of landing men on the Moon by gaining operational experience and testing the
Apollo systems. However, a great effort was also made to accomplish worthwhile
scientific tasks with photography and visual observations by the astronauts.
In planning the scientific tasks to be attempted on this mission, it was
obvious that one of the prime tasks should be photography of the lunar surface.
Such photography would furnish valuable information on the following:
1. Approach topography and landmarks for the early Apollo landings
2. The scientific merit and the roughness of areas for possible follow-on
Apollo landings
3. The broad structure and characteristics of the lunar surface
During the orbital part of the mission, a major portion of the lunar far side
would be in sunlight. Although almost all of the far side of the Moon has been
photographed by the automated Lunar Orbiter spacecraft, the photography
generally was made with the spacecraft relatively far from the Moon, limiting
the Lunar Orbiter photographs to an average resolution of approximately 100
meters. Thus, Apollo photographs of the far side would have much better reso-
lution than existing pictures.
Finally, it was recognized that contamination, both as it relates to window
fogging (which did occur) and to contamination clouds around the spacecraft,
shourd be studied for both scientific and operational interests.

vii
vln INTRODUCTION

In summary, Apollo 8 was a highly technical and operationally difticult


mission with a very tight schedule for science mission planning. That a worth-
while scientific plan was generated is a tribute to the scientists associated with
the mission. A(:complishment of so many of these tasks was possible only through
the close cooperation of all the center add program offiees, and an outstanding
effort by the flight crew. The scientific groundwork laid during the Apollo 8
mission will contribute substantially to the more extensive scientific missions
that will follow.
Acknowledgments

Many professional and amateur astronomers throughout the world observed


the Apollo 8 spacecraft in flight, and photographed and reported these obser-
vations. Meanwhile, other astronomers observed the Moon and watched for
lunar transient events--those infrequently observed ch.mges in appearance of
lunar features that indicate possible fluorescence of surface material or gases
escaping from the Moon. Special thanks are extended to the following persons:
Larry Bornhorst, Wallace Calkins, Bruce Campbell, Martin Green, Bill Hendrick-
son, Jean Pierrette Jean, D. G. King-Hele, C. W. Kohlenberger, Ronald Rogerio
de Freites Mourao, Alex Oanowita, and Roger Tuthill.
The authors would also like to express their appreciation to all those who
provided valuable data and assisted in carrying out experiments and evaluations
presented in this report. The following persons contributed specific data that
were used in specific sections of the report : F. C. Billingsley, F. Collen, Sol Giles,
Raymond Jordan, Noel T. Lamar, Charles Manry, T. B. McCord, Bruce Murray,
Gary Nakata, Samuel Priebe, D. H. Refoy, Raymond Sabata, Julio Salinas,
Francis Schafer, Fred Southard, Bill Straight, Richard Thompson, Jurrie van
der Woude, and Wilbur R. Wollenhaupt.
The crew of Apollo 8 acknowledges the assistance of Dr. Harrison H. Schmitt
in the preparation of chapter 1.

ix
1
Visual Observations
WILLIAM A. ANDERS, JAMES A. LOVELL, AND FRANK BORMAN

INTRODUCTION lizing terrestrial telescopes. Thus, the observation


and spatial context of any color variations ob-
The unique scientific aspect of the flight, of servable from 60 n. mi. were of particular interest.
Apollo 8 was the exposure of man and his ac- There is general agreement among the authors
cumulated training and experience to an environ- that regional variations in lunar surface color are
ment previously examined only through the pro- in shades of gray, possibly with faint brownish
grained systems of unmanned spacecraft. This hues similar to the color of dirty beach sand.
was an opportunity for the observation of another Our photographs on black-and-white film illus-
planetary surface in a situation that combined trate observed general lunar color more closely
continuously varying viewing geometry and light- than do the initial printings of the color films.
ing with the exceptional dynamic range and color Neither were specific colors observed associated
discrimination of the human eye. Add to this the with any particular lunar features.
potential of the experienced human mind for both These observations do not seem surprising, in
objective and interpretive selection of data to be retrospect, because the terrestrial colors with
recorded. which we are familiar can be attributed largely
These thoughts prompted the authors to sched- to the effects of oxidation, the biosphere, and
ule as much refresher and supplemental training water.
in lunar geology as the test-flight nature of the SURFACE TEXTURES
Apollo 8 mission would allow. Much of the training
Mare Areas
was keyed to the application of a critical item
checklist (table l-I, p. 5) to existing Lunar Both the far-side and near-side terminators were
Orbiter photographs. In addition to this training, across dark mare or marelike areas during most
we had use of an average eye resolution of about
of the 10 Apollo 8 lunar orbits. The surfaces of
100 feet from a 60-n.-mi. altitude and a 10 ×
the marelike materials in the far-side basin XV
monocular telescope. Limitations on our obser- resembled those of mare materials on the front
vations consisted primarily of partially fogged or side in their detailed characteristics--that is, rela-
smeared side and hatch windows, operational con-
tively smooth, with numerous small craters and
straints on spacecraft attitudes, and required
crater clusters superimposed on them. On the
changes in the planned timelines.
other hand, the variety of the number and moder-
COLOR ate scale features such as depressions, domes,
benches, and cones was nmch greater than was
Subtle color variations in the materials of the observed on near-side mare areas.
lunar surface have been previously noted by The near-side mare materials of the Sea of
special spectrometric photographic techniques uti- Fertility, illuminated at low-to-nmderate phase
2 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

angles, appeared very much like mare materials regular ground. In some places the texture was
we had studied on moderate-resolution, moderate- similar to sets of linear sand dunes. Locally, the
Sun-angle Orbiter photographs, except for the trend of this texture was roughly parallel to ir-
greater number of small bright halo craters ob- regular chains of craters set in an irregular herring-
servable at zero phase. The surface of the mare bone pattern. This was particularly pronounced
materials in the southern part of the Sea of near the western rim of the far-side basin XV.
Tranquility on the approach to landing site 1 and At high phase angles near the subsolar point,
the terminator resembled the surface of a frozen the visible surface texture of the far-side highlands
sea with a broad, but irregular, swell. Although was donlinated by a peppering of small bright
not as concentrated as in the far-side basin XV, halo craters. There were many times more such
the domes, cones, filled craters, depressions, and craters than we had expected to see based on our
overlapping benches on the mare materials near premission studies of Orbiter photographs.
landing site 1 gave the area an appearance similar
to a subdued version of the Pinacate volcanic
Slopes
region of Sonora, Mexico, as seen from aircraft
at about 40 000 feet altitude. We found that we could see considerable detail
The marelike materials of the far-side crater on slopes, both those in shadow and those under
Tsiolkovsky were the darkest appearing materials high illumination. Under high-Sun-angle illumi-
we observed. Our fiightpath took us about 200 nation (low phase angle), the slopes of crater
n. mi. north of Tsiolkovsky, and our visibility walls, particularly the steep walls of new craters,
to the south was limited by window fogging; showed a wide spectrum of albedo variation. The
however, this mare did appear to be very smooth, albedo texture of these walls was one of downslope
again with the exception of the ubiquitous small streaking of the lower two-thirds to three-quarters,
craters. Through the monocular telescope, and and a tendency toward roughly horizontal banding
then barely with the unaided eyc, we were able in the remaining upper portion of the walls. The
to discern several large boulders on this surface texture strongly suggests that talus slopes have
next to the base of the central peak. To be ob- formed downslope from layered materials in the
servable from over 200 n. mi., these boulders upper crater walls. The fact that small craters are
must be several hundred meters in diameter. One very rare on these steep slopes relative to the
of the boulders appeared to have a track leading nearby fiat areas indicates relatively continuous
away from it, indicating it had rolled off the and recent downslope movement of material.
central peak. Other than these boulders in Tsiol- The inner wails of large craters are characterized
kovsky, no boulders were observed on mare ma- by terraces and/or lobes of material that strongly
terials, even during use of the spacecraft sextant suggest slump and landslide activity. These proc-
for landmark tracking. esses are probably the dominant processes in the
gradual subduing of the raised portions of the
rims of large craters.
Highland Areas

Most of the far-side highland terrain was illumi- Ray Patterns


nated at relatively high Sun angles with a corre-
sponding loss in visible textural detail. Under this Some of thc most distinctive surface textures
lighting the surface materials appeared to be es- we observed were ray patterns radiating from
sentially homogeneous. At moderate Sun angles, many of the most sharply defined craters. The
in the region near longitude 160 ° W, there was a most extensive of these patterns were visible in
subtle but widespread fine lineation of shallow, the highlands only near the subsolar point or
locally irregular troughs and ridges running across somewhat farther from this point after our trans-
craters and intercrater materials alike. This tex- ealth insertion burn. On the mare surfaces, some
ture resembled, on a less massive scale, the tex- ray patterns, such as the two distinctive rays
tures radiating from the Orientale basin, and also from Messier A, were markedly visible. There was
that which would be left by a grass rake on Jr- no detectable thickness to any observed rays.
VISUAL OBSERVATIONS 3

PROBABLE IMPACT FEATURES The very dark marelike areas in the crater
Humboldt were visible to us after the transearth
Small Bright Halo Craters insertion burn. These irregular lobate areas form
a discontinuous ring between the brighter floor
One of the most striking features of the lunar
and walls of the crater, and in shape and detailed
far side is the number of small (less than 1000
outlines they strongly resemble the young dark
meters in diameter) rayed and bright halo craters
lava flows of the western United States. In ad-
that are visible near the subsolar point. There
dition to these marelike areas between the floor
were several times more of these bright craters
and wall, there were several very bright polygonal
than we had expected from our premission study
cracks visible in Humboldt's floor materials at
of Orbiter photographs. At progressively lower
our particular lighting angle.
Sun angles on the surface, these presumably fresh
The volcanic appearance of the surface textures
craters become visually less obvious; but we should
of materials in the far-side basin XV and in the
expect that they are also more abundant in the
vicinity of landing site 1 have been mentioned
landing areas than previously indicated.
in 'L preceding section of this chapter.
Large Impact Craters
Dark Craters
Our limited observation of large craters having
Two distinct examples of sharply defined, fresh-
the irregularly surfaced rims and apparent ejecta
looking dark craters several miles in diameter
blankets characteristic of impact craters did not
were observed. These craters have very dark in-
disclose much new information except for the
terior walls in contrast to the bright walls of most
observations on slope surface textures reported
other fresh-looking craters. One such crater was
in the preceding paragraphs. Some large craters
somewhere southeast of the Sea of Crises and
have single large spiral patterns on their floors
north of our orbital path; and the other was south
which are difficult to explain except by some form
of our path at about l l0 ° E longitude. These
of differential slumping. We were, however, im-
craters nmst be classified as of uncertain origin
pressed by the relatively subdued features of most
and certainly are not as clearly of impact origin
large far-side craters compared to most craters
as many of the fresh: craters we observed.
visible in the mare regions of the near side.
The crater Taruntius, although it has a well-
Possible Lava Tubes
defined central peak and surrounding array of
secondary craters, is unusual in appearance as The western rim and inner walls and bench of
compared to other large impact craters. Its single the far-side basin are crossed by a branching
rim is sharper in cross section, and there is a pattern of irregular troughs. The pattern strongly
prominent, roughly circular crack pattern in its resembles that of lava tubes such as those in
floor materials. flows on the slopes of Maunaloa, Hawaii. This
resemblance recommends caution when inter-
PROBABLE VOLCANIC FEATURES preting similar features on the Moon as trains of
secondary impact craters.
Regional Features
The region known as Smyth's Sea contains Regional Faulting
several examples of large craters with concentric Craters and crater-related features dominate
double rims. The material of the floors of these the portion of the Moon we viewed from Apollo 8;
craters and that between the double rims appeared however, several well-developed examples of
identical in texture, albedo, and color to the sur- graben-type regional faulting were visible. Al-
rounding mare. These observations support pre- though we were specifically interested in observa-
vious proposals we have heard that mare materials tions related to the question of regional strikeslip
were once relatively fluid and were implaced faulting, no evidence of such faulting was ob-
largely by volcanic processes originating essen- served. Local enechelon offsets in grabens indicate
tially directly below their present location. that shearing stresses have been present but, were
4 ANALYSIS OF AI'()LL(I 9, PH()T()(Ht, API1Y AND V]SUAL (t[_SI';RVATIONS

released by graben development rat her than strike- the clues to major topographic variations insofar
slip faulting as is common oll Earth. This differ- as these variat ions were related to different surface
ence between tcrrestrial trod hmar regional faulting prop(q'ties. The lack of clear-cut topographic pat-
suggests the possibility of a major difference in terns ma(h_ recognition and tracking of navi-
tectonic processes anti/or crustal lnechani('al prop- gation'tl l.mdmarks very difficult in this area.
erties.
The most slriking grabens observed were the EARTHSHINE
Cauchy rilles northeast <)f landing site 1 in the
()ur major surprise with respect to visibility
Sea of Tranquility. The southernmost graben
was the _,larity with which features could be
grades without interruption into a set of two
viewed in (,arthshine, p,trticularly after a few
irregular fault scarps which are stepped (town t<)
minutes of light adaptation. At one point we
the south.
were able t() (listinguish the floor, benches, and
w,dls of tim crater Copernicus with surprisingly
GENERAL LUN_AR VISIBILITY good definition, l,an(hnark tracking would prob-
ably be feasible in earthshinc, but difficult. There
Terminator does not generally appear to be sufficient light to
•((tempt hmdings under these conditions; however,
Our training had indicated that the observation
this possibility should not be eliminated without
of fine topographic details would be best at and
further study.
near the terminators. This fact was even more
pronounced in flight than we had anticipated. Also
confirmed was the ability to see detail in the ASTRONOM ICAL OBSERVATIONS
shadowed side of craters due to backscattered
light from the brightly illuminated opposite wall Solar Corona
of the crater. Detail was also visible in the bright
The solar corona wa_s observed ()nee through
wall areas.
the scanning telescope just before spacecraft sun-
rise. It. '_ppe'_red a_s a very bright glow just above
Zero.Phase Angle
the sunrise l)oint at the horizon with dimmer
Visibility was poor in areas viewed at low phase streamers falming out above and away from this
angle, but was better than had been expected. t)oint.
Topographic detail could be picked out in areas
Dim-Light Phenomena
within about 5 ° of zero phase, particularly at tow
Sun angles; that is, when we looked at the lunar No specific dim-light t)henomena were observed,
surface along the Sun line. Part of the explanation alth(iugh are'is proposed to contain them were
of our ability to see detail at or near zero phase exanfined visually. The Magellanic clouds appear
may be tied to the fact, that this point is always to have been observed, however, (luring the night
moving along the surface. This allows the inte- pass of one (if the hte lunar orbits.
gration and extrapolation of detail observed first
under favorable lighting to be carried into the Terrestrial Observations
zero-phase area.
Very little time was dew)ted to observations of
the Earth on Apollo 8. One interesting high-
Subsolar Area
altitude cloud, however, was seen shortly after
The visibility in the subsolar area was similar spaeecr'fft sunrise (luring the two orbits prior to
to that near zero phase close to the terminators, tr:mshmar injection. This was a long, thin, brown-
except that topographic detail was difficult to ish-gray ('loud that appeared to be slightly north
observe due to the complete lack of shadows in of our t r:_ck and below our orbital altitude of
the surrounding terrain. Albcdo differences were, qbout 100 n. nil. This cloud may be related to
of course, clearly visible within this area and were our S-1VB effluents.
VISUAL
OBSERVATIONS

TABLE1-I.---CriticalItem Checklist

Shape: Circular, asymmetric, polygonal, terraced


Observation Targets Indez Secondaries: Fields, loops, branchings, clusters
Rim: Radial patterns, concentric patterns, boulder
Apollo sites (A) Dark halo (DC)
fields, dune fields, *flow patterns, •colors
Boulder fields (BF) Elongate (EC)
*Ponds: Size limit, surface texture, flow patterns,
Color (C) Grabens/faults (G/F)
boulders, superposition, sources
Contacts (C3) Itigh relief surfaces (HR)
Walls: Textures, patterns, •layers, contacts, flows,
Crater fill: Impact craters (large, fresh)
channels, •caves, •colors
Concentric (CF) (ic)
Benches: Rim relation, *pond relation, •wall contact,
Domed (DCF) Low relief surfaces (LR)
channels, *eruptive features
Turtle back (TBF) Outcrops (OTC)
Floor: Textures, flow patterns, fracture patterns, boulder
Darkness (spacecraft): Ridges (R)
fields, •eruptive features, colors
Atmosphere Rilles (RL)
Central peak: *Layers, •layer orientation, contacts,
Gegenschein Slopes (terra) (ST)
colors
Star field Strain diagram
(HR) High Relief Surfaces
Zodiacal light Sunrise (spacecraft)
Delta-rimmed craters (DR) Surveyors (S)
• Determine any local variations in albedo or color
Domes (D) Terminators
Type: •Knobby terra, *domed terra, cratered terra,
Earthshine Transients
hummocky terra, parallel ridges, arcuate ridges
Eruptive craters : Translunar/transearth
Associations: •Eruptive features, patterns, boulder fields,
Chain (CC) Uncratercd surfaces (US)
crater fields, superposition, elongate craters
Zero-phase (Z) Color: Variation, change sharpness, associations, shape
*Source: Point, line, multiple, covered, direction
NOTE .--Abbreviations of key features to typical examples
spotted on the Target of Opportunity Chart. (LR) Low Relief Surfaces

An asterisk indicates an item for which visual obser- • Identify source of any observed flows
vation may be particularly fruitful. Type: Mare basin, mare region, very dark region, light
basin, smooth terra, very light region
(A) Apollo Sites Relief: Low domes, low ridges, rimless depressions,

• Note contacts other than those now known (see Apollo patterns, boulders, halo craters
Color: Variation, change sharpness, associations, shape
Site Landmark Chart)
• Source: Point, line, multiple, covered, direction
• Subjective judgments on lighting limits for LM landing
• Note albedo contrasts at zero phase *Benches: Type, color contrast, pattern contrast, crater
contrast, front slope relations, superposition
Regional contacts, color variations, •landmarks

(S) Surveyors (DF/TBF/CF) DomedTurtle BackConcentric


Crater Fill
• Observe and plot location of white spacecraft, the space-
craft shadow, or specular flashes • Identify any associated eruptive features
• Location: Flashes, shadow, white spot Type: Concentric, domed, polygonal, knobby, combi-
Position--Surveyor V nation
Association: Crater type, •eruptive features, age re-
(C3) Contacts
lations
Characteristics: Relief, patterns, color, boulders, filling
• Note other contrasts besides albedo and/or topography
level
Contrast: Color, relief, patterns, cratering, boulders
(ST) Slopes (Terra)
Geometry: *Sharpness, shape, elevation change

• Note any indications of layers or other structure


(IC) Impact Craters (Large, Rayed)
• Layers, •contacts, •outcrop, boulders, patterns, color
• Determine overlapping relationships between ponds and
other rim materials (BF) Boulder Fields
• Identify flow structures in rim materials
• Identify any layers, color differences, or caves on crater • Note minimum and maximum sizes observed 10 ° to 25 °

wall scarps from the terminator

• Identify any eruptive cones, flows, or domes at base of • Subjective judgments on SCT tracking of landed LM
crater-wall scarps • Note association and direction of boulder tracks

Type: Rayed, bright-halo, sharp-rimmed, low-rimmed, Association: Isolated, crater rim, crater wall, slope, dark
subdued halo, talus, slide
6 ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

TABLE 1-I.---Critical Item Checklist--Continued

Type: Mare, terra


Geometry: Size, shape, pattern, •boulder sizes Shape: Rounded, fiat-topped, elongate branching,
*Tracks: Direction, length, starting position •lobate
Source: Erosion, impact, eruption, •outcrop Characteristics: Size, *slopes, *lobes, colors, *age re-
lations
(US) Uneratered Surfaces
Central crater: Size, shape, rim, wall texture, *caves,
channels, bottom, colors
• Note position and describe characteristics
*Superimposed cone (see Dark Halo Crater Checklist
• Characteristics: Relief, color, albedo, reflections, pat-
*Associations: Surface, eruptive features, dikes
terns, boulders, fractures

(OTC) Outcrops (DR) Delta-Rimmed Craters

• Note location and associations of any observed outcrops • Determine if rim is a composite of cones, domes, and/or
• Association: Crater wall, central peak, rille wall, terra flows
slope, eruptive feature Shape: Circular, polygonal
*Characteristics: Size, shape, color, reflections, accessi- *Rim : Extent
bility • Crest: Cones, breaching, slumps
Walls: Textures, patterns, •layers, •cones, contacts,
(DC/EC/CC) Dark Halo/ElongateChain Craters caves, •colors
Floor: Filling type, flow patterns, eruptive features,
• Identify any shallow impact crater fields near base of source

cone (RL) Rilles


• Identify any associated flows, channels, or color
• Identify any layers or caves in crater wall • Observe tails of sinuous flUes for evidence of alluvial
Shape: Circular, elliptical, arcuate, linear deposits
Halo: Shape, limits, relief, patterns, rays, *boulders, • Observe heads of sinuous rilles for evidence of exact
small craters, colors, superposition source of any erosion agents
Cone: Shape, breaching, *channels, patterns, boulders, • Note any interruptions in continuity of small sinuous
•color8
riiles, such as ridges or bridges
Crater: Shape, wall texture, caves, channels, bottom, • Determine any interruptions in continuity of small
*colors
sinuous rilles, such as ridges or bridges
• Associations: Alinements, domes, flows, faults, contacts,
• Determine strain relationships near angular and arcuate
geologic units, age relations rilles
Shape: *Sinuous, linear_ angular, arcuate, combination
(G/F) Grabens/Faults
Head: Type, association, breaching, colors, age relations
Body: Sharpness, continuity, •floor features, bridges,
• Note nature, age, and direction of offsets
• Determine associated strain relationships leeves, layering, colors, age relations
• Tail: Low fans, fine branching, leeves, terminations,
Shape: Linear, enechelon, angular
Associations: Eruptive features, rilles, parallelism, con- colors, age relations
Associations: *Control features, parallelism, constant
stant angles, age relations
*Offsets: Contacts, ridges, craters, patterns angles, patterns

Ends: Shape, termination point (C) Color

(R) Ridges • If visible color is observed, note associated features in


as much detail as possible
• Identify any attached or superimposed flows, cones, or • Note any color contrasts on cliffs or steep slopes
dikes *Association: Mare bench, halo crater, dome, cliff,
• Determine associated strain relationships boulder field, rille, very dark or very light/fresh areas
Type : Mare, terra • Color chart: Best match, range, phase variation
Shape: Rounded, flat-topped, wrinkle, branching, com-
Contacts: Change, sharpness, associated variations
posite
Characteristics: Colors, age relation (Z) Zero-Phase
*Association: Cones, domes, dikes, local flows, rifles,
fractures • At zero-phase point on mare approximately 16 ° from
(D) Domes terminator, note horizontal and vertical limits of
effective washout
• Identify any attached or superimposed flows, cones, or • Judge lighting limits for LM landing
dikes
VISUAL
OBSERVATIONS 7

TABLE1-I._ritical Item Checklist--Continued

• Note any albedo contrasts on cliffs and stee l) slopes Darkness (Spacecraft)

Albedo: *Contacts, features, detailed associations


• Note celestial position and coverage of any observed
*Washout: }torizontal linfits, vertical limits, rang(, func-
din>light phenomena such as:
tion, terrain function, relief definition limit
Star field: General density, identification
Terminator Gegensehein: Antisolar (Gemini), intensity, shape
Zodiacal light: 90 ° from Sun to corona
• Identify ans' flow fr<mts on low relief surfaces Atmosphere: Star halo, glow after sunset or prior to
• Identify any alluvial and/'or braided fans at the tails of sunrise

sinuous rilles Libration points: Central Gemini, begin o|)servation at


• Note any glows or obscm-ations at lun,u' sunrise (near LOS
side) terminator Sunrise (Spacecraft)
*Subtle relief: Benches, flows, l)atterns, roughneas,
boulder fields • Note celestial limits of solar corona

*Lunar sunrise: (flows, ol)seurations • Note beginning and extent of limb I)rightening prior to
sunrise
Earthshine • Note first observation of contamination cloud and
change in visibility immediately after sunrise
• Evalu'_te landing and landmark tracking feasihility IAmb brightening: Start GET, start position, max GET,
Washout: Horizontal limits, vertical limits, range func- max position, colors, diffuse light GET, diffuse light,
tion, terrain function, relief definition limit position
Visibility: Dark adal)tation, features visible, nfinimum Solor corona: First light GET, boundary GET, streamer
crater size, Earth angle function direction, bead GET, bead position, colors
*Features: Known detail, relief contrast Exterior contamination: Cloud GET, visibility change
Zero phase: Albedo contrast, washout, *spotnwter star recognition, S/C shadow
*Landmarks: Smallest crater, initial points
Translunar / Transearth
Transients
• Note celestial position and coverage of any dim-light

• Note associated features and temporal variations phenomen't


Position: Declination/direction, *association Aurora: Shape, color, limits
Exterior contamination: Star field degradation, teinporal
Characteristics: Brightness, color, type, size, shape,
obscuration, flash changes

*Variation: Temporal, nmvement, terminator, position Libration l)oints: 21.5 hours GET, Pisces (*), Aries (a),
Pleiades
*Source : Feature, area
2
Initial Photographic Analysis

AREAL COVERAGE the pocket of the inside back cover. (:over'_ge by


the fihn magazines is indicated l)y different colors,
and franm lmmbers are given within the footprints
JAMES H. SASSER AND F. EL-BAZ
of the frames. Data pertaining to the 70-ram film
are also tabulated in appendix A, together with
The combined Apollo 8 photographic coverage
of the lunar surface is summarized ill figure 2-1. reproductions of the recovered film.
Much of this area was photographed by Luna III
COMPARISON WITH LUNA III
and Lunar Orbiters I to V. However, the Apollo 8
PHOTOGRAPHS
photography was taken with different lighting
conditions and at different viewing angles. In
E. A. WHITAKER
addition, the resolution of Apollo 8 photography
is in most cases significantly better. The Soviet spacecraft Luna III photographed
Detailed index charts of the areal coverage of the lunar eastern liml) and adjacent far-side areas
the different film magazine types can be found in in October 1959, under essentially full-Moon

J_
/
/
/
/
\ /
\ /

FIGURE 2-1.--Lunar-surface coverage of Apollo 8 photography.


l0 ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

illumination. Although analysis of tile material 1)y 17 ° N, ll7 ° E. For Apollo 8 frame 2506-B, the
two Soviet groups (Leningrad and Moscow) pro- corresponding coordinates were 8 ° S, 67 ° E, a
duced somewhat different results, the Moscow difference ,_f 25 ° latitude and 50 ° longitude. To
group added 18 new n_unes to the more t)rominent facilitate comp'_rison of the photographs, an image
features. The most (lefinitive (liscussion of the of frame 2506 w.a_ projected onto a precision
Luna III material is prot)ably that given in 36-inch-dianmter Inatte-white hemisphere using
references 2-1 and 2-2. tt 101/_-inch-focus lens for nearly correct restora-
tion of the get_metry. The direction from which
this image w_s then photographed was approxi-
mately the same ,as that of the Luna III photo-
graph, although the correct scale distance could
not be duplicated. Figure 2-2 is a reproduction
of this recentered view. Figure 2-3 is a somewhat

FI(_URE 2-2.--Apollo 8 frame 2506-B recentered on Luna


III subspaceeraft point.

Although the five Lunar Orbiters photographed


the entire area included in the Lunt_ III material,
the totally different illumination and viewing-
angle conditions have largely ren(tered compara-
tive studies impossible. However, these difficulties FI(;UI_.E 2-3. Best Luna III frame with Soviet nomen-
have now been almost entirely removed by the clature added.
Apollo 8 acquisition of a number of photographs
of the Moon after transearth injection (TEI).
Illumination conditions closely nlatche(I those for cleaned-up version of the best high-resolution
Luna III (less than 7 ° difference), and viewing Lun.l III frame, t_riginally published in references
directions were not grossly (lifferent <luring this 2-1 and 2-2. A considerable degree of corre-
phase of photography. st)on(lence exists between the two figures, par-
For Luntt III, the subspacecraft point was ticularly whel_ viewed with a stereoscope.
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 11

DISCUSSION OF NAMED It is best seen on Lunar Orbiter V M-181 and is


FEATURES charted at 37.7 ° N, 102.5 ° E, on LFC-1.
2. MaxweU.--This is a 100-kin-diameter for-
mation with a dark, fiat floor, overlapped by
E. A. WHITAKER Lomonosov (fig. 2-4). It is best seen on Lunar
Orbiter V M-181 and is charted at 31 ° N, 99 ° E,
PROVISIONALLY APPROVED on LFC-1.
NOMENCLATURE 3. Ed/son.--Edison is a 60-kin-diameter, dark-
floored formation contiguous with Lomonosov
The 18 new names given to far-side features
by the Moscow group were submitted to and (fig. 2-4). It is best seen on Lunar Orbiter V
M-181 and is charted at 26.2 ° N, 100 ° E, on
provisionally approved by the International Astro-
LFC-1.
nomical Union (IAU) in 1961 (ref. 2-3). Of these,
4. Popov.--A 6-kin-diameter crater situated in
12 are covered by the Apollo 8 photography. It is,
therefore, comparatively simple to a_certain the an ill-defined bright area (fig. 2-4), Popov is best
seen on Lunar Orbiter IV M-146. It is not charted
topographical nature and charted coordinates of
on LFC-1 but would be situated at 15.5 ° N,
these features via the sequence: Luna III map to
97.5 ° E.
Luna III photograph to recentered Apollo 8
5. Hertz.--A 1O-km-diameter crater with a small
photograph to appropriate Lunar Orbiter photo-
graphs to Aeronautical (;hart and information nimbus, Hertz is situated on the floor of a larger
Center (ACIC), USAF, Lunar Farside Chart crater (fig. 2-4). It is best seen on Lunar Orbiter II
M-196 and is charted at 11.5 ° N, 98.7 ° E, on
LFC-1. The latter records only 3 of the 12 names
LFC-1.
in question, namely Joliot-Curie, Lomonosov, and
6. Lobachevsky.--This feature is a vague, dark-
Tsiolkovsky. The remainder are discussed briefly.
ish area that does not correlate with a crater.
1. Giordano Bruno.--Although at the center of
The area is best. seen on Lunar Orbiter II M-196
a major ray system (fig. 2-4) which extends onto
the earthward hemisphere as far as Mare Crisium, and is centered at 8 ° N, 110 ° E, on LFC-1.
7. Pasteur.--A sharp-edged crater some 30 km
this sharp crater is only about 25 km in diameter.
in diameter with moderately bright walls, Pasteur
is surrounded by a vague nimbus. It is best seen
on Lunar Orbiter II M-196 and is charted at
9 ° S, 109 ° E, on LFC-1.
8. Sklodowska-Curie.--The central crater of this
small but conspicuous nimbus is only 5 km in
diameter. Best seen on Lunar Orbiter II M-196,
it. is charted at 21.2 ° S, 99.5 ° E, on LFC-1.
9. Soviet Range (Montes Sovietici).--This elon-
gated bright area was nfisinterpreted as a moun-
tain range by the Moscow group (ref. 2-4). The
author previously interpreted the marking as two
distinct overlapping ray systems (refs. 2-1 and
2-2), a conclusion confirmed by Apol)o 8 photo-
graphs. The center of the southernmost ray system
is a sharp-featured crater 35 km in diameter, best
seen on Lunar Orbiter III M-121 and charted
at 5.7 ° S, 121.5 ° E, on LFC-1. The center of the
more northerly system is a 90-kin-diameter crater
with sharp features and a large central peak. It is
poorly depicted on Lunar Orbiter I M-136 (over-
FI¢_URE 2-4.--Apollo 8 frame 2209-D showing Giordano exposed) and Lunar Orbiter IV M-122 (low reso-
Bruno ray system and other named features. lution). It is charted at 4 ° N, 120 ° E, on LFC-1.
12 ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO _ I'HOT()(;I_,APItY AND VISUAL ()BSERVATIONS

PROPOSED NOMENCLATURE Orbiter data, and although it does not" replace


the Lunar Orbiter data, the Apollo 8 photography
At tile 1967 General Assembly of the IAU, it
was agreed that the new names for lunar far-side does supl)lement the records.
The Apollo 8 photography has provided good
features suggested by the Soviets on the basis
of their Luna III and Zond III missions should stereoscopic ('overage unhampered by the slightly
be held in abeyance until a spe,'ially appointed offset strips characteristic of the Lunar Orbiter
subeomnfittee could examine the whole question photogralIhs. It is now possible to obtain accurate
taking the far-side Lunar Orbiter photography quantitative measurements of the elevations and
slope angles of relatively large areas of the lunar
into account. As a guideline, it was decided that
surface I/b' standard photogrammetric techniques.
about 500 new names be used; that is approxi-
Accurate contour maps and accurate positioning
nmtely the number of craters 50 km in diameter
of featm'es on the back side should now become
or larger that are 1)resent on lhe far side.
•t reality.
The following recommendations will be for-
Relatively distortion-free, full-disk lunar photo-
warded to Conmfission 17 (The Moon) of the
graphs were obtained from Apollo 8. These will
IAU by t he author for action by the Subcommittee
on Lunar Nomenclature: enable the selenodesist to make accurate position
measurements and better determine the figure of
1. The natures and coordinate positions of the
the Moon.
following features are confirmed: Giordano Bruno,
Because the Apollo 8 film was returned to
Maxwell, I_omonosov, Edison, Joliet-Curie, and
Earth, it was l)ossil)le to process it under con-
Tsiolkovsky.
trolled conditions. Therefore, the Apollo 8 photo-
2. The following names should be reassigned:
graphic prints have a greater dynamic range than
Popov, Hertz, Lobachevsky, Pasteur, and
the l,unar Orbiter prints; one result is that the
Sklodowska-Curie.
Sun-exposed slopes show considerably more detail
3. Montes Sovietici (Soviel Range) is incor-
than comparable Sun-exposed slopes on the I,unar
rectly classified.
Orbiter t)rints.
4. The source craters of the bright ray system,
One of the most valuable aspects of the Apollo 8
which was misinterpreted as a mountain range
photography is that extensive photographs under
by the Soviets, should receive names. The northern
high-illunfination conditions (Sun angle greater
crater will receive a name autonmtieally because
than or equal to 50 ° front the horizontal) were
of its diameter, but the diameter of the southern
crater is less than 50 km. Gior(Itmo Bruno is also obtained for large areas of the lunar far side.
This achievement has resulted in much new infor-
less than 50 km, but the retention of its name is
mation that has an important bearing on geologic
indicated because of its extensive ray system.
interpretation and terrain studies, and which
should be of significance to future lunar ground
GEOLOGY
operations.
Also new with Apollo 8 is vertical high-resolution
PRELIMINARY COMPARISON OF APOLLO
terminator photography (Sun angle less than or
8 AND LUNAR ORBITER PHOTOGRAPttY
equal to 7 ° from the horizontal), which shows
very small elevation differences and emphasizes
ROBERT G. STROM
fine structural detail. The Lunar Orbiter records

Introduction contain only several medium-resolution photo-


graphs with Sun angles less than 7 ° , and even
Both the Apollo 8 and Lunar Orbiter photog- these are not well exposed near the terminator.
raphy are good sources of information for geologic
Resolution
and terrain studies of the lunar surface. The
Lunar Orbiter photography provides high-reso- A preliminary evaluation of the resolution of
lution coverage of practically the entire surface the Apollo 8 photography indicates that the verti-
of the Moon. However, the Apollo 8 photography cal 80-ram lens records have a resolution slightly
has several important adwmtages over the Lunar better than the best Lunar Orbiter photographs
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 13

of the far side taken with the 610-nun lens. This


greater resolution is due to the fact that the
Apollo 8 spacecraft was at an altitude of 110 km
above the lunar surface, whereas the Lunar
Orbiter spacecraft was at an altitude of approxi-
lnately 1300 to 1400 km over the far side. It is
possible to resolve craters of approximately 60
meters in diameter on the high-resolution Lunar
Orbiter photographs and of approximately 50
meters on the Apollo 8 photographs of the far
side. However, the Apollo 8 prints used in making
the comparison are sixth generation and, there-
fore, may be subject to an approximate 10- to 15-
percent loss in resolution over the original film.
The Apollo 8 250-mm lens vertical photography
taken from lunar orbit was recorded on color film
SO-368. The resolution is approximately three
times better than the 80-mm lens photography,
recording craters as small as 17 meters in diameter.
However, the prints made from the color trans-
parencies and used ill making the comparison are
fifth generation and are, therefore, subject to an
approximate 10-percent loss in resolution over the
original film.
In summary, the Apollo 8 vertical photography
has a resolution approximately 1.2 to 4.2 times
higher than the best Lunar Orbiter photography
of the lunar far side. A more accurate determi-
nation of the Apollo 8 photographic resolution
must await examination of the original film.

High.Illumination Photography
One of the most important aspects of the Apollo
8 photography is the acquisition of high-resolution
photographs under high-illumination conditions.
For the first time, it is possible to compare topo-
graphic features photographed by Lunar Orbiter
under relatively low lighting conditions (phase
angle of approximately 20 ° ) with the same features
photographed by Apollo 8 under high lighting
conditions (phase angles greater than or equal to FIGURE 2-5.--Comparison of photography of same area

(ll ° S, 174 ° E) on the lunar far side. (a) Portion of


50 °) and with approximately the same resolution.
Lunar Orbiter II frame H-33 (Sun angle 20°); (b)
Figures 2-5 to 2-8 are pairs of Lunar Orbiter
Apollo 8 frame 2081-D (Sun angle 34°).
and Apollo 8 photographs of the same areas taken
under different lighting conditions. The Lunar
Orbiter photographs were all taken at a relatively more apparent. On the Apollo 8 photograph in
constant Sun angle of approximately 20 ° from the figure 2-5(b), albedo differences are just beginning
horizontal, while the Apollo 8 frames record Sun to appear at a phase angle of 34 °, and it is still
angles varying from 34 ° to 77 °. As the Sun angle easy to recognize topographic features by their
becomes greater, differences in albedo become shadows. At the higher phase angles (51 °, 62 °,
14 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

FIGURE 2-6.--Comparison of l)hotogral)hy of same area


(13 ° S, 157 ° E) on the lunar far side. (a) Portion
of Lunar Orbiter II frame ti-75 (Sun angle 19°);
(b) Apollo 8 frame 2100-D (Sun angle 51.5°).

and 77°), shown respectively ill figures 2-6(b),


2-7(b), and 2-8(b), the albedo differences are
readily apparent; but it becomes considerably
more difficult to recognize elevation differences
because of the lack of shadows.
The surface of the Moon at high phase angles
is covered by thousands of small bright spots and
streaks which were observed visually and de-
scribed by the Apollo 8 astronauts. These bright
spots and streaks represent either the relatively
steep slopes found on the interiors of craters and
sides of hills, or rays and nimbi surrounding small,
sharp craters. Examples of bright interior crater
slopes are indicated at A in figures 2-6(b) and
2-7(b). These craters are sharp rimmed and bowl
shaped, as seen on the matching low-Sun-angle
Lunar Orbiter photographs (A in figs. 2-6(a) and
2-7(a)). The crater in figure 2-6 is about 8 km
in diameter and 1.5 km deep, while that in figure
2-7 is about 10 km in diameter and 2 km deep.
Judging by the extinction of shadows in craters
of similar size and shape on other Apollo 8 photo- FIGURe: 2-7. Coml)arison of photography of same area
graphs, the interior slopes are between 30 ° and (14 ° S, 146 ° E) on the lunar far side. (a) Portion
40 °, the most likely angle being roughly 35 ° . On of Lunar ()rl)itcr I frame tt-ll5 (Sun angle 20°);

the interior slopes near the rim crest, the material (b) Apollo 8 frame. 2112-D (Sun angle 62°).
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 15

Terminator Photography
Tile Apollo 8 mission succeeded in obtaining
well-exposed vertical terminator photography at
ph-Lse angles less than 7 °. Tim Lunar Orbiter
records contain only a few medium-resolution
t)hotographs with Sun angles less than 7 °, and
even these are not well exposed near the termi-
nator. This type of photography is important,
because it shows very small elevation differences
and emphasizes fine structural detail that is not
apparent on photographs taken at higher Sun
•ingles. Analysis of terminator photography is not
only important to the geologic interpretation of
surface features but it is also helpful to mobility
studies for roving vehicles.
Figure 2-9 is an Apollo 8 photograph taken at
5 ° S, 153 ° W, near the sunset terminator at a Sun
angle of 2 ° . This photograph shows numerous
shallow depressions and swales that are not visible
at higher Sun angles. Unfortunately, all well-
exposed Apollo 8 vertical high-resolution ternli-
nator photography was taken of the highlands on
the far side of the Moon. The astronauts described
the mare surface very near the sunrise terminator
as having undulations similar to the surface of
the sea. It is important to determine if these
slight undulations are no more than features simi-
lar to the shallow depressions and swales seen in

FIGURE 2-8.--Colnparison of photogrt_phy of same area


(12° S, 127° E)on the lunar far side. (a) Portion
of Lunar Orbiter I frame H-136 (Sun angle 21°);
(b) Apollo 8 frame 2129-D (Sun angle 77°).

has a mottled appearance, which grades down-


slope into alternating dark and light streaks, the
bright streaks being dominant over the dark.
These bright streaks and patches probably repre-
sent newly exposed surfaces resulting from the
downslope movement of the material. Fm_RE 2-9.--Apollo 8 frame 2048-D of hmar far side.
16 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

figure 2-9, or if there is some fundamental differ- PRELIMINARY INTERPRETATIONS OF


ence between the very gentle topography of the LUNAR GEOLOGY
maria and highlands. D. E. WILHELMS, D. E. STUART-ALEXANDER,

AND K. A. HOWAaD
Summary
The Apollo 8 photography is an important Lunar Far Side
source of new information for geologic and terrain The Apollo 8 photography augments the Lunar
studies of the lunar surface. Several of the new Orbiter photography of the far side. For the first
aspects of this photography include: time, good high-illumination photographs were
taken from a spacecraft so that areas of different
1. Undistorted stereoscopic coverage along a
reflectivity could be delineated; ill particular,
continuous strip of terrain of more than
4800 kin. rayed craters and mare areas. Reflectivity as seen
on near-full-Moon photographs has been an es-
2. Relatively distortion-free, full-disk lunar sential tool ill small-scale (1:1@000 and
photographs. 1 : 5 000 000) lunar geologic mapping, and the lack
3. High-resolution photography exhibiting a of high-resolution reflectivity data has reduced
continuous variation of Sun angles from 0° the effectiveness of large-scale mapping. Such data
to 80 ° . are useful in estimating relative crater ages, lo-
cating rough terrain (bright), and identifying
The resolution of the Apollo 8 vertical pho-
young volcanic deposits (dark). The Apollo 8
tography is roughly 1.2 to 4.2 times higher than
far-side photography also includes the best termi-
the best far-side Lunar Orbiter records, and thus
nator photography obtained from a spacecraft.
provides the highest resolution of the lunar far
Both the high-Sun and low-Sun vertical photo-
side acquired to date.
graphs show good detail of the area directly under
Conclusions from a comparison of the Lunar
the orbital track, and the oblique photographs
Orbiter low-illumination and Apollo 8 high-illumi-
reveal a mountain range that had not been pre-
nation photography include:
viously identified.
1. The degree of brightness is directly related Two extensive ray systems that just overlap
to the inclination of the slope; the steeper the are shown in high-illumination Apollo photo-
slope the brighter it is at high Sun angles. graphs. A discussion of these ray systems, forming
2. The bright interior slopes of craters result the so-called Soviet Mountains, and the source
from the downslope movement of material, ex- craters is given in the section of this chapter
posing fresh surfaces. entitled "Discussion of Named Features." These
3. All small craters with bright rays and nimbi two relatively small craters must be among the
on the high-illumination Apollo 8 photography youngest on the Moon. Other such brightly rayed
correspond to sharp, fresh-appearing craters on craters will probably be found from future high-
the low-illumination Lunar Orbiter records. How- illumination photography of the rest of the lunar
ever, not all small sharp-appearing craters on the far side.
Lunar Orbiter records are bright on the high- Albedo variations are quite distinct in most
illumination Apollo 8 photographs. Since the high-Sun photographs (fig. 2-10). The abundance
bright-halo craters are apparently the freshest and wide distribution of fresh, rayed craters, down
craters, it appears that the examination of high- to the smallest resolvable sizes, are particularly
illumination photography is the best method of impressive. Most of the ray patterns are sym-
determining the degree of freshness of craters. metrical; however, several bright-rayed craters
4. For safety reasons, bright, blocky crater display ray-excluded zones. A discussion of this
halos and bright, possibly unstable, slopes should fact and of possible causes is given in the section
be initially avoided in ground operations. How- of this chapter entitled "Craters."
ever, bright craters may be ideal for gathering Albedo differences are also distinct on mare
fresh rocks that have been excavated from the surfaces. For example, Mare Smythii, whose cir-
solid subsurface layer. cular form shows up with exceptional clarity,
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYS I._, 17

FIGURE 2-10.--Stereoscopic pair (Apollo 8 frames 2103-D and 2104-D). These photographs were taken at high Sun
illumination and show various geologic features such as stripes in mass-wasting debris on crater walls; horizontal
structure high on crater wails; numerous small, bright cnLters; and topographic features barely visible monoscopically.

tinuous around a nunfl)er of craters and ahnost


appears in one high-illumination picture to have
certainly represent a layer or a rock ledge.
a partial clark border around a lighter interior (fig.
The oblique shots from Apollo 8 are also useful
2-2). This is reminiscent of the wider dark border
because they cover a wide field of view and because
of Mare Humorum. Apparently, some of the
relief features are seen more clearly. One inter-
youngest and darkest volcanic products are em-
esting discovery from the oblique photography is
placed at the margins of circular basins.
a lnountain range 200 km long located at 20 ° S,
Light and (lark stripes running down crater
160 ° W (fig. 2-11). This mountain range does not
walls much like stone stripes in talus are conunon
seem to be a_ssociated with any cr,tter or b.tsin.
(fig. 2-10). A zone of irregular, but generally
The range is also discernible in the upper center
horizontal, stripes is characteristically observed
portion of Lunar Orbiter I frame M-38.
higher on the walls. The horizontal separation
The strip of continuous photographic coverage
probably represents two kinds of mass wasting
makes conspicuous any variations in normal ter-
above and below a break in the slope along crater
rain patterns. For example, oddly patterned terra
wails. Some horizontal stripes appear to be con-
18 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

extent to which knowledge of this region has been


increased by Apollo 8 photography or can be
improved by future lunar photography.
The south and east parts of the Crisium basin
and the adjacent so-called lake country of small
irregular maria were photographed poorly by
Lunar Orbiter, and one location along the east
Crisium basin margin was missed completely
because of light-struck film. The same area
was covered by Apollo 8 photography, but
all of the photographs have relatively poor
resolution. However, many of the photographs
are useful for positioning of features, be-
cause they give a perspective that is different
from Earth-based and Lunar Orbiter photographs.
The color pictures of magazine B taken during
FIGURE 2--11 .--Mountain range on lunar far side (Apollo 8 TEI of large parts of the lunar disk centered
frame 2319-E). near the eastern limb (fig. 2-2) fill in the previous
coverage, provide an excellent perspective, and
consisting of numerous subdued hummocks and have better resolution than the Earth-based photo-
swales, but containing few fresh craters, was graphs. However, their resolution is less than that.
identified at latitude 10 ° S, longitude 180 ° E. The of the Lunar Orbiter photographs. The complex
topography is similar to the probable-volcanic maria in this east-limb region can be mapped
units of the lunar near side in the vicinity of the from these color photographs. Other coverage is
craters Zupus and Descartes, and is crossed by an on black-and-white film. Numerous photographs
unusual round scarp or flow front similar t,) a of magazine G (the high-speed film) cover this
mare ridge. (See the section of this chapter en- area and much of the rest of the eastern part of
titled "Possible Volcanic Features.") These fea- the Moon. These pictures have resolutions typical
tures had been overlooked until they were seen of Earth-based photographs, although again with
in Apollo 8 photographs, but reexamination of a different perspective. Frames 2863 to 2866 are
Lunar Orbiter photographs showed that the un- the best photographs taken of this entire area
usual texture extends over a broad region to the during the Apollo 8 mission and, therefore, for the
south. A second area of interest is a field of area along the east Crisium basin margin missed
secondary craters selected from Lunar Orbiter by Lunar Orbiter, the best of all photographs.
photography as Apollo Target of Opportunity It is unfortunate that the Apollo 8 photographs
(ATO) 12 at 9 ° S, 164 ° W. Although the intricate were not taken with finer-grained film and a
pattern of secondary craters, gouges, and linea- longer focal lens, or both. (The writer is not sure
ments in this area is displayed in detail by Apollo whether these photographs were taken with the
8 photographs, the wide views of the Lunar 80-mm or 250-ram lens.) Photographs on magazine
Orbiter pictures are necessary to see the relation D (frames 2203 to 2206), taken with the 250-mm
of the secondaries to their source craters and to
lens during TEI (before the color photographs
the surrounding terrain. The Apollo 8 and Lunar were taken), also give useful regional views of
Orbiter pictures are clearly complementary. the Mare Crisium/lakes region, although they
Lunar Near Side show smaller areas than the other magazines and
have poor resolution (film-grain limited); frame
It was hoped that additional photography could 2206 covers the totally missed spot. Other frames
be obtained of large areas of the eastern front
taken with the 250-mm lens on this magazine
side and east limb where Lunar Orbiter photog- give similar regional views of the area farther
raphy is inadequate for reliable regional geologic
east, at and beyond 90 ° E. Frames 2181 to 2184,
studies. This section of the report describes the
which include part of the lake country, were
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 19

taken obliquely with tile 80-mm lens; therefore,


their resolution is also quite low, even though
they were taken in lunar orbit.
Mare Fecunditatis, the Secchi peninsula (target of
opportunity (T/O) 78a), and Mare Tranquillitatis
were photographed most often by forward-looking
obliques. A large block of photographs of this area
is on magazine E. One sequence (frames 2339 to
2345)--in addition to some rather dark, poorly de-
tailed pictures of Messier and Messier A (T/O 75),
Mare Fecunditatis, and the Secchi peninsula--
includes two excellent, well-exposed, and well-
illuminated scenes in Mare Tranquillitatis taken Fmua_" 2-13.--The crater Maskelyne F and the area

with the 250-mm lens. One of these (fig. 2-12), north of landing site 1 (Apollo 8 frame 2345-E).

which includes the Cauchy rilles and Cauchy


the area covered by Lunar Orbiter I frame M-41
domes (T/O 87, frame 2344), shows the area
and Lunar Orbiter IV frames H-66 and H-73,
better than does any Lunar Orbiter photograph
are not particularly useful. The western, near-
and is useful in spite of the extreme obliquity
terminator pictures in the vicinity of landing site
and low resolution. The same description applies
1 are underexposed and are north of landing site l
to the other frame (2345, fig. 2-13) in the vicinity
proper. The only good frames in this sequence
of landing site 1 where, unfortunately, the window
are franles 2300 to 2309 (fig. 2-14), which were
cuts off the landing site 1 from view. The so-called
taken when the camera was pointed back. Tile
training sequence (frames 2271 to 2309) is an
film sensitivity had also improved greatly, pos-
improvement over Lunar Orbiter IV photography
sibly through prefogging. Crater densities, fine
in approximately the first two frames, where the
textures in several geologic units (including one
near scene is within the poor Lunar Orbiter IV
frame H-61. The next frames, however, within probably like that in landing site 1, unit tm in
fig. 2-14), and relations among mare ridges (show-
ing overlap of a subdued ridge by a sharp one)
are all brought out in the low-Sun illumination
(fig. 2-14).
The part of the continuous strip of magazine C
that falls within the Fecunditatis-Secchi-Tran-
quillitatis area has too low a resolution to be any
more useful than even the poorest Lunar Orbiter
photographs, because it was taken at an extreme
oblique angle and with the 80-mm lens. The only
useful parts of the latter strip on the front side
are those near the subspacecraft point; namely,
those in the eastern parts of frames to approxi-
mately 2798 covering the terra east of Langrenus.
These frames have better resolution than the
Lunar Orbiter photographs of the same area.
Ages of craters are easier to determine from the
Apollo 8 photographs than from the Lunar Orbiter
photographs, because the details of mass wasting
seen on Apollo photographs are more diagnostic
of age than the details of topography seen on the
Lunar Orbiter photographs taken at a lower Sun
FIGURE 2-12.--Cauchy domes and rilles (Apollo 8 frame
2344-E). angle. Forward-looking obliques taken with the
20 ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PIfOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL ()BSERVATIONS

the subseclion "Rayed Craters and Bright-Halo


Craters" in the section of this chapter entitled
"(}raters. ")
The obliques taken with the 250-ram lens near
the terminator of the Goclenius-Capella area
(nmgazine E) (for example, fig. 2-15) '_re a con-
siderable improvement over Lunar Orbiter IV
H-65. The type of terrain can be identified; the
•Lge of craters and other units can be estimated by
their freshness; and craters on plains surfaces can
I)e counted. The photographs are also an improve-
ment over Lunar Orbiter IV H-72, but less so,
because the latter are fairly good. The main ob-
jective achieved by the sequence was to fill in the
Colombo area (T/O 73). A large number of the
targets of opportunity selected to be taken on
this Inission are nearby, but most of them are
either not within the strip taken or they are
shadowed by higher peals. The only ones seen
c Crater materi.d
cel Irregular ('rater material, clust,q's (volcanie) are the McClure cluster (T/O 72) and the hilly,
ci Irregular crater material, single probably volcanic materials (T/O 84). These illus-
d Dome material (volcanic?) trate the potential value of target preselection.
In Mare material However, the other Apollo 8 pictures add infor-
mh Hilly mare material (small volcanic constructs?) nlation on the fine textures of craters and rela-
mr Undivided mare ridge material
tively fiat-lying materials that permits their cla_si-
mr, Older marc ridge material
mr2 Younger mare ridge nmterial fication. It is concluded that pictures taken with
th Hilly terra material the 250-ram lens out to 12 ° to 14 ° from the
tm Terra-nmntling material (similar to that in site groundtrack are useful for geologic purposes.
2 P-27) Extreme obliques taken near the terminator
ts Smooth terra material
Contact soutil of the track after the Goclenius-Capella
Inferred contact
LLLJJ Depression
• Scarp

FIGURE 2-14.--Area northeast of landing site 1.

8O-mm lens are best out to approximately 5 ° from


the subspacecraft point and are useful out to 10 °.
Frames 2779 to 2788, m'_gazinc C, are in the
vicinity of Mare Smythii and include some of the
ring craters (possible calderas) characteristic of
this region. The photographs have a much higher
resolution and a very different illumination than
the best Lunar Orbiter picture, IV H-27. A com-
parison of Lunar Orbiter "rod Apollo pictures
taken at different illuminations was one of the
main objectives of Apollo 8 photography, and the
vicinity of Mare Smythii is the only place it can
FmURF_2-15.---Part of Mare Fecunditatis and the craters
be done with near-vertical pictures taken on the
Goclenius, Magelhaens, Magelhaens A, and Colombo
near side. (For the results of this comparison, see A (Apollo 8 frame 2225-E).
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 21

pass (also magazine E) show the crater Daguerre a fairly fresh crater with secondaries (frames 2262
(T/O 94) and nmch of Mare Nectaris. The copies to 2264), turned out to be not so fresh and was
of these which were available for study are to() partly missed; the pictures are of little interest
dark to be useful, but copies viewed earlier -it except as fill-in. Crater Behaim (T/O 63), with a
the NASA Manned Spacecraft (;enter were good domieal central peak (frames 2268 and 2269),
and potentially useful. However, these extremely was well photographed, although the angle was at
oblique photographs should be used in conjunction approximately the extreme of usefulness (10 ° from
with vertical photographs from Lunar Orbiter, the groundtrack); however, 1he peak lacks (tetail,
which show shapes in plain view better than and nothing was learned ._bout its origin. The
Apollo 8. Southwest of Daguerre is a cracked, low, crater Ansgarius was also included with these
circular, domelike area about 30 kin in diameter targets "rod provides a view of older, large er,tters.
that is cut by fresh cracks and split into blocks
standing at various levels. This feature was ob-
CRATERS
served on Lunar Orbiter photographs (H-72), but
its r,dsed, domelike character was not recognized Crater Characteristics
until the Apollo 8 picture, which was taken at a
lower Sun illumination. It is one of several probable F. EL-BAz

volcanic features in this margin of Mare Nectaris.


Introduction
There are two sequences in magazine E taken
at an extreme oblique angle of the Sina-s-Jansen- Apollo 8 photography will be of value in the
Vitruvius area (including T/O 106 and T/O 107) study of the cratering process in general and
near the terminator north of the track. One se- probable impact craters in particular, because
quence (frames 2846 to 2850) has the proper areas on the far side of the Moon that are heavily
exposure to bring out useful detail at the very populated with probable impact craters received
low Sun angle and gives by far the best pictures good photographic coverage with favorable light-
of this area. Details of mare ridges and a variety ing and viewing conditions. Some craters of prob-
of domes are brought out by shadows. The other able volcanic origin, however, were also photo-
sequence (frames 2334 to 2338) is too clark to be graphed.
useful. (At least, the copies available to the Some of the more imposing impact features were
writers are too dark.) The good pictures among photographcd following TEI, where near-full-
these demonstrate that near-terminator photog- Moon photographs (frames 2462 to 2506, maga-
raphy is always desirable even at extreme oblique zine B) display a number of bright-rayed craters.
angles, provided it is properly exposed. Several of the familiar probable impact craters
Targets of opportunity taken oblique'y in the on the Earth side are clearly visible (fig. 2-2).
east-limb region, where the Sun angle was inter- The crater Humboldt is in the lower part of the
mediate (39 ° to 63°), yielded approximately the photograph, and t tie mare-filled crater Tsiolkovsky
amount of information hoped for when taken with is near the lower right edge. Two bright ray sys-
the 250-mm lens. The photographs (taken on tems forming the so-called Soviet Mountains
magazine E) are an improvement in resolution dominate the area in the middle portion of the
over Lunar Orbiter photographs of the same re- photograph (figs. 2-2 and 2-4).
gion, and neither the lack of strong shadows nor At high-Sun angles, details of impact craters
high albedo contrast prevents information from are well recorded. This is particularly true in the
being extracted. The best of these T/O photo- case of fresh or relatively young craters, where
graphs is that. of T/O 65, the crater Kapteyn the usually bright ejecta surrounding the crater
(frame 2270). Its angle of obliquity (6 ° from the contrast strongly in albedo with their surround-
groundtrack) is quite satisfactory for good per- ings. For this reason, most of the vertical as well
spective and resolution, and details of the mass- as the oblique high-Sun photographs taken by
wasting process of its slopes can be seen. Other the Apollo 8 crew appear "peppered" with small,
pictures, though good, yield few new geologic bright spots, many of which are surrounded by
results. Target of opportunity 58, thought to be radial ray systems (fig. 2-10). The Apollo 8 astro-
24 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

FiauaE 2-18.--Crater rays. (a) Ray-excluded zones around

probable impact craters (Apollo 8 frame 2869-G) ; (b)

oblique view of craters Messier and Messier A. Note

the zero-phase point directly below the craters. The

Sun angle is 17 ° (Apollo 8 frame 2341-E).

crater wall. Many other blocks are visible, es-


at 11 ° S, 165 ° W. The interior walls of the crater
pecially near the upper edge of the photograph.
are terraced, and the terraces display layering.
In figure 2-20(b), large blocks are clearly seen
The crater has an irregular but fresh-appearing
on the shadowed crater wall in the middle of the
central peak, and the floor is strewn with large
photograph. The area illustrated in figure 2-20(c)
mounds of rock. The outer rim of the crater shows
is within 5 ° on the lunar surface from the crater
characteristics of impact-produced ejecta, includ-
in figures 2-19 and 2-20(a). In the center of the
ing a number of secondaD _ crater chains. Lunar
photograph, a small trough cuts through an old,
Orbiter I photograph M-28 shows that the crater subdued crater. Near the southern end of the
has a well-developed bright-ray system.
trough, a large north-south-trending ridge or block
Figure 2-20 is a set of Apollo 8 photographs can be seen clearly. This ridge resembles a half-
depicting large blocks of lunar rocks. One segment buried disk standing on edge. A block near the
of the crater is enlarged in figure 2-20(a). The northern end of the trough displays a similar
layering is brought out by the effect of shadows form. (The block circled on the outer rim of the
(Sun angle 17°). In this 250-ram lens view, block impact crater in fig. 2-20(a) bears similarity to
fields are quite evident on the floor, along the
this form.)
terraced walls, and on the crater rim. Two large
Other blocks were observed visually by the
blocks, larger than 100 meters in diameter, are
Apollo 8 crew on the central peak of Tsiolkovsky.
circled; one is on the rim and the other on the
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 25

FIGURE 2-19.--Impact crater with well-developed field of secondaries (Apollo 8 frame 2245-E).

hi agreement with studies relating block size to Crater Chains


crater size, the large blocks observed by Apollo 8 Continuous and/or discontinuous chains of
occur in and around large craters. No doubt craters and crater clusters are common on the
many small blocks are present in association with lunar surface. Many of these are similar to vol-
smaller craters on the far side, but they were not canic crater chains on the Earth and may be the
resolved by tile lenses used. product of lunar volcanism. Others appear to be
26 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

FIOURE 2-20.--Apollo 8 photographs depicting large blocks


of lunar rock. (a) Frame 2328-E, (b) frame 2266-E,
(c) frame 2060-D.

the product of ejected material from impact craters chain is discontinuous; the crater in the lower
and are described as secondary crater chains. right corner of the photograph is separated from
Apollo 8 photography includes several examples the rest of the chain. Between this crater and the
of crater chains (figs. 2-21 and 2-22). In figure next one in the chain is a trough which is probably
2-21, a crater chain is made of several round-to- a graben. The four craters in the middle are of
elongated craters alined in one direction. The approximately equal size but of varying depth.
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 27

FIaURF_ 2-21.--A probable volcanic crater chain (Apollo 8 frame 2673-C).

The largest depression, on the upper left end of that the chain is of internal origin; that is, that
the chain, has an elongated form, a raised-but- it is a volcanic crater chain.
not-very-sharp rim, and an irregular interior. This The photograph in figure 2-22 was taken at
interior is suggestive of a crater pair rather than low-Sun angle, about 7 ° . Although shadows cover
of a single crater. These characteristics suggest part of the crater interiors, much detail is clearly
28 ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPIIY AND VISUAL ()BSERVATIONS

FmvnE 2-22.---A probable second:_ry (,rater chain (Apollo 8 frame 2053-I)).

visible. The crater chain running from the lower Both parts of the crater chain are surrounded
right to the upper left parts of the photograph is by lineaments, which form an irregular V-shape
different from the crater chain described pre- pointing toward the lower right, end of the chain.
viously. Ill this case, a larg(', elongated depression Such features have been called "herringbone"
abuts against a crater with a polygonal form. structures and are thought to be the product of
Following a break in the chain, ,_ crater cluster deposition of material from ejecta streams that
made of craters similar in shape is seen. The are secondary to a larger impact crater. (See the
craters of the cluster are of different sizes, but section of lifts chapter entitled "ftypersonic Gas
their depths are proportional to their sizes. Flow.") This '_rray is located at about 5 ° S,
INITIAL PHOTOGRAI'HIC ANALYSIS 29

157 ° W. It: bears similarity to other chains of 10-5

craters and (',rater clusters previously photo-


graphed by Lunar Orbiter IV. The array is be-
lieved to be, and probably is, secondary to the
eraterlike Mare Orientale.
Small craters also form continuous and/"or dis-
continuous chains. Apollo 8 near-ternfinator pho-
tography of the lun,tr far side includes several ....... lypical curve Ior "fresh" craters,
i0-6
Lunar Orbiter photographs of
examples.
landing sites

Rayed Craters and Bright-Halo Craters

NEW'ELL J. TRASK AND GORDON A. S_ANN

It has long been known that contrasts in the


albedo of lunar surface nmterials show up most
clearly under high angles of Sun illunfination.
Spacecraft photographs have indicated clearly
that this effect extends to snmll features, especially
craters with rays and bright halos. Very few rayed
and bright-halo craters are seen on photographs
taken with low angles of Sun illumination in
contrast to numerous such features on higher-Sun-
angle photographs. The photographs taken by the
\
Apollo 8 crew include ninny with angles of Sun
illumination higher than those of any previous
spacecraft photography. As expected, these high-
Sun-angle photographs show a myriad of bright
spots at the positions of craters with rays, bright
halos, and walls. These craters are of interest
because they are the youngest features on the
Moon and may be surrounded by fresh ejecta of
lunar bedrock. Also, they may pose hazards to
landing spacecraft.
Direct comparison of several of the Apollo 8
frames can be made with Lunar Orbiter photo-
graphs of comparable scale taken with much lower
Sun angles. Seventy-five craters on part of Apollo I I
8 frame 2787-C on the east. limb appear to have
rays or bright halos, compared to 18 craters in
the same area covered by Lunar Orbiter IV H-27.
FW, uRE 2-23.--Frequency of rayed and bright-halo craters
Corresponding numbers on Apollo 8 frame 2112-D on Apollo 8 photography compared with frequency of
on the far side and Lunar Orbiter I H-115 are "fresh" or eumorphic craters on low-Sun-illumination
65 and 12, respectively. Thus, many craters in photographs.

the Apollo landing sites may have rays or bright


halos that are presently unrecognized. Figure 2-23 might be only the bright walls of craters were not
shows a typical cumulative count of bright-halo included, although many are probably small,
and rayed craters from Apollo 8 photography. bright-halo craters. Also shown is a typical count
Only craters having a clearly defined bright halo of so-called eunmrphic or "sharp" cratem in
or set, of rays were included; bright spots which Apollo landing sites made from low-Sun-angle
30 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

photographs. Allowing for differences in judgment around small craters (10 to 100 meters in diameter)
as to what constitutes a sharp crater, the two consist of })locks quarried from lunar bedrock
curves are in essential agreement for crater diam- beneath the lunar regolith that have not been
eters of 100 meters. Accurate counts of rayed and exposed to the darkening effects of space radiation
bright-halo craters for diameters less than this (ref. 2-5). Thus, the number of subresolution
cannot be made on the Apollo 8 photographs blocks around small craters in the Apollo landing
presently available to us; and whether the two sites may be higher than currently anticipated.
curves continue to agree to smaller sizes is not If this interpretation is correct, however, there
known. High-Sun-angle photography with higher should be a limiting diameter below which craters
resolution could answer this question. Nor is it do not have bright halos or rays; the limiting
known if the points for the bright-halo and rayed diameter at any point would depend on the local
craters apply equally to the areas studied and to thickness of the regolith. Estimates of the thick-
the Apollo landing sites, but it seems likely that ness of the regolith in the landing sites range
they do. Visual comparison also shows clearly from 1 to 10 meters (ref. 2-6); new craters up to
that some large, sharp craters (up to several 40 meters in diameter might lack ejected blocks
kilometers in diameter) do not have bright halos, if they formed in an area of the thickest regolith
although they do have bright walls. Apparently, development. Other origins for rays and bright
the rays and bright halos are of such a thickness halos should not be ruled out at present. The
that they have been destroyed on some large importance of pulverization, grain size, and grain
craters, although this degradation has not ap- shape in producing rays has been emphasized
preciably changed the apparent sharpness of the (ref. 2-7); and an origin as sublimates resulting
rim crest. from the impact of cometary debris has been sug-
An important observation made during the gested by some. Determination of whether or not
comparison of the Apollo 8 and Lunar Orbiter there is a cutoff in bright-halo craters below a
photographs is that several craters on sunward- certain diameter that correlates roughly with the
facing slopes are not especially sharp and yet have thickness of the regolith would have an important
distinct bright halos. These craters have somewhat bearing on the validity of these theories.
fuzzy, indistinct halos on the Lunar Orbiter pho-
tography, and it was not clear if these were Hypersonic Gas Flow
genuine bright halos or were some sort of optical
effect developed on the bright, sunward-facing J. A. O'KEEFE, W. S. CAMERON, AND
slope. The first interpretation now appears to be HAROLD MASURSKY
correct. In annotating large-scale photographs of
the Apollo landing sites for use in the onboard High-resolution lunar photography, especially
data package, all mappers noticed similar ques- that of Apollo 8 and Lunar Orbiters IV and V,
tionable bright-halo craters without sharp rim shows a curious set of markings, denoted "grass
crests on sunward-facing slopes. Some of these raking" by the Apollo 8 astronauts, around most
were shown as bright-halo craters, but many were of the large impact craters. Near Tycho, Co-
not. It now appears that the number of bright- pernicus, Aristarchus, MSsting C, and the un-
halo craters in the landing sites should be in- named far-side crater at 11 ° S, 165 ° W, a pattern
creased at least by these examples which earlier is visible, the predominant element of which is a
were in question. The bright-halo craters without kind of braid. Figure 2-19, from Apollo 8 photo-
sharp rim crests probably are morphologically graphs, shows a sharp, new, far-side impact crater.
subdued from the time of their formation because Figure 2-21, centered near 7 ° S, 167 ° W, shows
of _he instability of loose debris on the slopes. part of the pattern near the same crater. Figure
Assessment of the hazards posed by the probable 2-24 from Lunar Orbiter V shows part of the
increase in the number of rayed and bright-halo pattern near Copernicus with its "bird's-foot"
craters in the Apollo landing sites depends on the pattern. Lineations are seen which form approxi-
interpretation placed on these features. The usual mately equal angles with the radius from the
interpretation is that the rays and bright halos center of the crater. In some regions, these line-
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 31

FI(IUal_ 2-24.--Chain of secondary craters of Copernicus, showing bird's-foot pattern (Lunar Orbiter V frame M-144).

ations are visible as appendages to craters, es- glasses (ref. 2-10). Even if the amount of water
pecially when these craters occur in lines. In other contained in the lunar rocks is small, the strong
areas, the lineations are not obviously associated heating of many cubic miles of rock by a large
with craters but simply extend across the surface. impact event will produce large volumes of ga_s.
The characteristic thing about the lineations is Great impact events arc thought to produce ,_
that, wherever they are observed, they make, in base surge similar to those produced by atomic
any given region, a definite angle with the radius blasts (ref. 2-11). The base surge is a particulate-
from the center of the associated crater. material-laden mass of gas that pours out over
The markings may be caused by splashing of the surrounding region with high velocity after
ejecta from secondary craters. Similar markings the event. Perhaps deposits formed by this
have been experimentally produced (ref. 2-8) by mechanism surround young lunar craters like
hypersonic turbulent flow in wind tunnels (fig. Censorinus, M6sting C, Aristarchus, and the Marc
2-25). These markings are also found on reentry Orientale basin.
heat shields. On the lunar surface, the base surge would
It has been shown that the Ries suevite pro- expand into a vacuum and reach very high ve-
duced by shock metamorphism accompanying the locities. At a temperature of 2000 ° C, the velocity
impact event has lost most of it,s water (ref. 2-9). of sound in the gas is probably near 1 km/sec,
Similar results are known for the other impact and the Mach angle from the patterns appears
32 ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

chains (fig. 2-21) were described. The following


is a brief description of the constructional land-
forms which may be the products of volcanism.
A few steep-sided cones with elongated and
breached summit pits were photographed by
Apollo 8. One such positive feature is illustrated
in figure 2-26, where the hill (18 km in diameter)
is surrounded by an apron of lower relief. Although
the Lunar Orbiter photograph H-36 of this site
suggests that the feature may possibly be the
result, of impact, the feature probably constitutes
a volcanic cone and associated flows. A similar
example is seen in Apollo 8 frame 2686-C. In
this case, a steep-sided cone with a breached
summit crater (approximately 10 km in diameter)
occurs near the center of a large fiat-floored crater.
Here again, this feature may be an impact crater
on a small hill.
The only probable volcanic domes observed in
the photography are the Cauchy domes, which
are clearly visible in frame 2344 (fig. 2-12). The
Sun angle and viewing direction of this photograph
FIGtrRE 2-25.--Pattern produced by hypersonic turbulent were suitable for the delineation of the difference
flow in a wind tunnel.
in appearance of the smooth-surfaced, broad, low
domes with distinct summit craters from that of
to be at 10 °. The Mach number is then 6 or more, the rugged domes.
and the velocity of flow is 4 kin/see. Since the A number of flows and flow fronts of probable
velocity of escape from the Moon is 2.5 km/sec, volcanic origin were detected in the Apollo 8
this mechanism seems to offer the possibility of photographs. At least two examples are pictured
removal of material (refs. 2-12 and 2-13) from in figure 2-27. A crater, which is cut by the upper
the lunar surface by ablation of this kind. That right edge of the photograph, displays a raised
is, the deposits surrounding impact craters, the rim and an extremely irregular floor. The floor is
peculiar marking around secondary crater chains, strewn with irregular, positive features and a
the "grass raking," and the ejection of fragments number of small craters. The rim crest of the
from the lunar surface may be caused in part by crater appears to have been the starting point
the hypersonic gas flow. of a number of flows. One flow trends in a south-
easterly direction and ends in a pool of dark
POSSIBLE VOLCANIC FEATURES material. The floor of a large crater southeast of
the pool also displays a flow front reminiscent in
Landforms gross morphology of those on the northeastern
floor of the crater Copernicus (which may be
F. EL-BAZ AND H. G. WILSHIRE
debris flows).
Only a few probable volcanic landforn_s were Scarps which may be flow fronts of volcanic
photographed by Apollo 8. The section of this material or debris are seen in the left portion of
chapter entitled "Preliminary Interpretations of figure 2-27. One of these is very sharp and clearly
Lunar Geology" includes descriptions of several delineates at least one generation of dark mantling
areas where regional volcanism appears to have material. The scarp cuts across several craters,
been responsible for some surface units and struc- which suggests, alternatively, that it may be a
tures. In the section of this chapter entitled fault scarp or at any rate tectonically controlled.
"Craters," probable volcanic craters and crater A crater located near the lower end of the pictured
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 33

FIGURE 2-26.--Stereogram of area on lunar far side depicting a probable volcanic cone (Apollo 8 frames 2055-D and
2056-D). (a) Frame 2055-D, (b) frame 2056-D.

FI¢_VaE 2-28.--Apollo 8 frame 2709-C, showing debris


FI(;URE 2-27.--Probable volcanic or debris flows (Apollo 8
flow lobe.
frame 2687-C).

noted as debris flows rather than volcanic flows.


part of the scarp is about 18 km in diameter. An example, which may be seen in Apollo 8 frame
This crater displays a subdued rim and a dark 2709-C (fig. 2-28), is a conspicuous narrow lobe
apron of mantling material in a subradial texture. which extends from the inner wall of a large
Other flow lobes are more likely to have origi- crater toward its center.
34 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

Sublimates Vaporum (which could, however, be bedrock ex-


humed from burial by dark mantling materials).
E. A. WHITAKER
The second class is exemplified by the well-known
The possibility has recently been discussed (ref. marking, Reiner ,, and, more particularly, by the
2-15) that some of the bright markings observed chain of bright patches extending both north and
on tile lunar surface at small phase angles might south of this feature. Lunar Orbiter IV frames
be caused by deposits of certain materials which H-157 and H-162 show that these markings do
have sublimed during internal lunar heating. Since not correlate with surface topography.
that time, Lunar Orbiter photographs have re- Lunar Orbiter photography has revealed the
vealed other features which nmy tentatively be presence of two more regions displaying such
ascribed to sublimated substances, because their markings. One region is centered at 35 ° S, 165 ° E,
appearance is not easily ascribed to any of the and is best seen on Lunar Orbiter II frame M-75;
normally accepted lunar surface processes. the other is situated immediately north of Mare
These markings may be divided into two classes. Marginis and is partially visible on Lunar Orbiter
The first is exemplified by a number of white- II frame M-196.
topped hills in the general area north of Mare Some Apollo 8 photographs display this region

FIGURE2-29.--Unusual surface markings in region of northern Mare Marginis and crater Goddard (from Apollo 8 frame
2208-D).
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 35

under high illumination. In these photographs, Earth as caused hy differences in particle size
tile full extent of this unusual group of markings (rcfs. 2-21 and 2-22), age (refs. 2-23 and 2-24),
call be appreciated. Figure 2-29 illustrates the or composition (ref. 2-25). A strong argument
brightest region of these markings, which surround has been made in favor of compositional differ-
the large (lark-floored crater God(lard, and should ences being the cause of color differences, based
be compare(I with figures 10, 11, trod 12 of refer- on the results of an extensive series of differential
ence 2-15. (?lcarly, more work needs to be done photometric measurements.
on these features I)efore any firm conclusions can If subsequent evidence proves the correlation
be drawn. between spectral reflectivity and composition, and
sufficient "ground truth" can be obtained, accu-
COLORIMETRY
rate high-resolution color measurement will be a
useful tool in geologic m'tpping of the lunar
GENERAL STATEMENT--TIlE COLOR ()F
TIlE MOON surface.
Photoelectric photometry is the most accurate
E. A. WUITAKER AND A. F. H. GOETZ means for making spectral reflectivity measure-
ments. Accuracies of 0.1 percent were obtained
(_onfusion has arisen over apparently conflicting
(ref. 2-25). However, at the present time, pho-
estimates of the coh)r of the surface of the Moon.
tometry is a slow, point-for-point method, not
Tile astronauts' most frequent lunar descriptions,
suitable for large-area coverage or convenient data
such a_s "gray" 'md "whitish-gray," agree with
display. With some sacrifice in accuracy, photo-
measurements made 1)y Surveyor III (ref. 2-16).
graphic methods can be used. By using micro-
However, precision measurements niade from the
densitometry, photographic plates can be analyzed
Earth definitely show that the color is not pure
for quantitative color differences; but, again, data
gray but, as the astron'mts also suggested, rather
display is difficult, and the method is time con-
a brownish gray. Correctly exposed color fihns,
taken either from lunar orbit or from the Earth, suming. Telescopic color-difference pictures that
give qualitative color information in inmge form
invariably display a warm rather than a cool tint.
have been produced (ref. 2-26). In this method,
It has long been recognized that the color of
a print is produced from a sandwich of a blue
the lunar surface is not entirely nmnotonous, but
negative and a red positive plate. Color bound-
that small differences of tint are displayed by the
aries, particularly in mare regions, are easily de-
ln._ria (ref. 2-17). More recently, it has been
tected. Errors are introduced, however, because
found that the color also changes with phase, a
phenomenon caused by differential polarization
1.0 ;0-
at different wavelengths. The mean relative re- s

flectivity of the lunar surface compared with ,t S S

completely nonselective reflector is illustrated in .8


figure 2-30 and is based on data given in reference ©s
S
2-18, which also gives the transmission data for
>
the filters used. Any substance which reflects a .6 S
S
continuous spectrum in the manner exemplified S

by figure 2-30 will appear browner, or warmer,


to the eye than the illuminating light. ©•

Comparisons of measurements of the color of


the Moon and of the color of a distinctly brown .2
Hawaiian lava showed the lava to be the browner
U B V R I
(ref. 2-19). A comprehensive study of lunar surface
colors has shown that even the "bluest" areas
I , I , I I II II i
.4 .5 ,6 .7 .8 .9
(for example, Aristarchus) are somewhat brown- Wavelength,
ish, a result obtained earlier (ref. 2-20).
A number of investigators have attempted to FIGURE 2-30.--Refleetivity of lunar surface compared
with thai of nonselective reflector.
interpret color differences measured from the
36 ANALYSl, _, ()F AI'()I,IA) ,R PHOTOGRAI)IIY AND VISUAL ()BSEI{VAT1ONS

of the difficulty of accurately controlling the 4350 ._) aad 29+0.6NI) (center wavelength
photograplfie developnmnt and reproductitm proc- 6600 ,_), were mounte([ in :_ slide devil.e, which
esses over a wide dynamic range. attached to the lens in lieu of a filter. Exposures
An image-processing nwthod has been developed were made :alternately through each filter. The
to utilize the high information content and goo(t time between exl)osures was less than 5 seconds.
display characteristics of photography and to Using the Hasselbla(l camera and 80-mm lens,
circumvent the difficulties of standard micro- ]ulmr-surface resolution from orbit was expected
densitometry in order to obtain quantitative coh)r to ])e 50 meters, apl)r(,ximatcly 20 times greater
information. Details of this nletho(l will be dis- titanthe best t';arth-I)_ed telescope ph<)togr'q)hy.
cussed in the folh)wing sectimL
A study of differentitd (.ohn" phohmmtry (ref. Data Return
2-25) reveals thqt a large mmd)er of spectral For operali(mal reasons, no sche(luled T/t) pho-
curves, particularly in the mare regions, exhibit togr'q)hy, including re(l-blue filter phot,)gral)hy ,
a nearly linear 1)ehavior in the wavelength region was carried out in the ninth orbit. At /his time,
of 4000 to 7000 _. Therefore, the greater the wave-
the filter holder was used to reduce the light level
length separation of the points in the spectruln in the television ('amera. Following TE[, "L nuln-
observed, the greater the differelwe signal ot)- bet of red-blue phot,Jgraphs were taken with
tained. Typical differences obtained across color
the 250-ram lens. Accidentally, 33 expo-
boundaries in the maria, after a]bedo norlnali- sures were nmde on St)368 (color) fihn anti
zation, are 4 to 7 percent. Such color differences were, therefore, not usal)le for analysis. Un-
are not detectable by the eye or on color fihn fortunately, these were the best exposures nmde,
without special enhancement teelmiques. a_ the inmges filled almost the entire, frame.
Shortly after TEI, eight pairs of red-blue photo-
APOLLO 8 COLOR EXPERIMENT graphs were expose(l on type 2485 high-spee(l filnL
This film had been intended for <lint-light photog-
raphy, but was exposed 'tccordiiig to the plan for
A. F. H. GOETZ
type 3400 fihn. Thirteen exposures were also made
Introduction using the polarizing filters. No exl)osure calibration
was made l)efore processing the 2485 film (maga-
Apollo 8 presented a unique pl'ttform from zine G). Therefore, no quantitative color data
which to perform high-resolutioll lunar coloN- can be retrieve([ fronl these images. Mag,Lzine E
metric photography. All previous spectral reflec- (type 3400 fihn) cont.dns 10 pairs of red-blue
tivity or color measurements, with the exception exI)osures. However, the full-Moon, quarter-phase
of those made by Surveyor (ref. 2:16), have been images measure only 8 mm or less in diameter,
made from the Earth where even good atmos- making them unsuitable for analysis.
pheric seeing limits resolution to approximately
1 km at the lunar subearth point. Furtherlnore, Image Processing
no far-side color lne-Lsurements had I)een under-
The requirement for reducing a large lmmber
taken prior to Apollo S. of coh)r-sep'n'ation t)hotographs to obtain high-
resoluti(m, (tuantitative color data precluded the
The Experiment
use of standard microdensitometry methods.
The design of the Apolh) 8 two-color experiment The Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL) hnage
was largely dictated t)y hardware and mission Processing I,abor:Lt,wy offered to assist in the
constraints. Color-separ._tion i)h,)tography on analysis of Apolh_ 8 t wo-col()r t)hotography. The
black-and-white fihn was the only feasible lnethod process is :t variation of routines use(l in the
for obtaining quantit._tive color information from analysis of other tyl)es of i)hotograp]ty (refs. 2-27
orbit. Two flters were chosen to give the greatest an(I 2 28).
wavelength separation connnensurate with space- To develop and test, the met h(_(l, telescope
craft-window transmission and fihn-sensitivity photogral)hs of several hmar areas were taken
constraints. The filtem, 47B (center wavelength through a Sl)acecrafl window and thl'ough the
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 37

appropriate filters. The film and processing were in a "picture" that is independent of overall
identical to that, used for the Apollo 8 flight. all)edo differences, the negative values of which
Sensitometric calibration strips were l)reexposed represent varying shades of one color, while zero
through the same filters. represents gray, and positive values represent the
Both the film and the calibration strips were other color. The colors are progressively more
digitized with a scanning spot size of 25_. A intense :_s the DN departs from zero.
10 000-picture-element (pixel) sample of each cali- Figures 2-31 and 2-32 are the original, scanned
bration step was scanned. Plots of the digital photographs, taken with 47B and 92q-0.6ND
number (DN) versus density (D) of the initially (center w,tvelength 6600 /_) filters, respectively.
exposed wedges produced overall system calibra- Plato, Sinus Iridum, and a portion of Mare
tion curves, DN versus the logarithm of the ex- Imbrium are visible. Figure 2-33 is the difference
posure (log E) for each of the filters.
Each picture was scanned several times, and
the multiple scans were averaged to minimize
noise, after which ._ geometric correction program
was used to register the red and blue pictures to
each other. These became the master input, pic-
tures for the processing.
Each picture was then converted to the log E
domain through application of the appropriate
calibration curve to each pixel. The relative ex-
posure between pictures was then adjusted to
give an equal DN in each picture in an area
defined by observation to be gray. Subtraction
of one picture from the other is the equivalent
of taking the ratio of the exposures, which results

FIGURE 2-32.--Same as figure 2-31, but taken through a

92q-0.6ND (red) filter.

FXGURE 2-31.--Mare Imbrium, including Plato and Sinus


Iridum, taken at Mount Wilson Observatory. This
photograph was taken through Mount Wilson's 24-
FIGURE 2-33.--Blue-minus-red difference picture. In this
inch telescope through an Apollo spacecraft heat-
shield window using 35-ram 3400 film and a 47B photograph, boundaries exhibiting uniform color in

(blue) filter. The original negative was scanned with spite of albedo contrasts, such as the eastern rim of

a 25u spot size and the tape replayed to produce Sinus Iridum, demonstrate the dynamic range and

this photograph. good resolution achieved by this method.


38 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL (}BSERVATIONS

picture in which the light areas are blue and the lunar photometry (refs. 2-34 and 2-35) is not
dark areas are red. The differences have been sufficiently precise to separate this opposition
expanded to nearly fill the dynamic range of the effect from the general linear phase effect.
processor. A point known as Mare Imbrium 2 From the work reported in reference 2-20, it
(ref. 2-25), located southeast of Heraclides Prom- was predicted that the surface of the Moon should
ontory, was chosen to be gray. display a strong heiligenschein. This prediction
The major color boundary in .Mare IInbriun_ was first confirmed by photographs transmitted
has been measured photoelectrically (ref. 2 25). by Surveyor I (ref. 2 36) in which the shttdow of
A color difference of 5.54-0.5 percent was meas- the camera is seen to be surrounded by a bright
ured across the boundary at the points Mare halo several degrees in di'mmter. Although a few
Imbrium 3 and 4. The corresponding difference photographs transmitted by Lmmr Orbiter V in-
found by image l)rocessing is 54-2.5 percent. ('lude the zero-phase point, those Apollo 8 photo-
graphs that include this point afford the first
PHOTOMETRY opportunity to make detailed measurements of
the lunar hciligenschein. For accurate work, a
AN INVESTIGATION OF THE LUNAR recording nlicrophotonmter should be used and
HEILIGENSCHEIN allowances shouhl be made for vignetting and
other geometrical effects. However, as an interim
E. A. WmTAKER
procedure, two frames (frames 2126 and 2148)
The occurrence of the heiligenschein as a ter- which showed |ninimunl albedo differences in the
restrial phenomenon has undoubtedly been known area of the heiligenschein were chosen. A trans-
since ancient times. More recently, it has been parent |nillimeter scale was attached, in turn, to
described and its production attributed to two each of these frames (which were in tile form of
distinct phenomena (refs. 2-29 and 2-30): positive fihn transparencies), and nleasurements
1. Internal reflections within transparent beads of density were taken at eight l-ram intervals in
(as in beaded projection screens, reflective tape, each direction outward from tile brightest point
and paint) or drops (as in dew on a lawn). using a simple visual spot densitometer. Two of
2. A shadowing phenomenon in structures such the sensitometric step wedges at the tail of the
as vegetation, whereby all shadows are hidden ._t film were also measured.
very small phase angles. Once the density differences of the original
Recent work (ref. 2-7) has shown that a number wedge steps and the scale of the photograph were
of terrestrial substances display a distinct heiligen- known, the actual relative reflectivity of the lunar
schein effect; but, from this work, it not possible surface at various angular distances from the
to decide whether or not other phenomena may zero-phase point, was easily determined. The re-
also be effective. sults are presented in table 2-I.
Photometric work (ref. 2-31) has established To determine the brightness/phase-angle curve
the fact that the brightness of all illuminated for larger phase angles, it is advantageous to make
portions of the Moon increases rapidly near full use of the integrated brightness measurements of
Moon. A similar effect was noted and measured Rougier (in ref. 2-37). The lunar photometric
(refs. 2-32 and 2-33) in the case of the asteroids. function has been correctly shown (ref. 2-38) to
It was found that, for phase angles greater than be the product of the folh)wing three phase func-
approximately 5 ° , brightness increased linearly tions :
(on a logarithmic scale) with decreasing phase; 1. The phase function of the particles forming
but, for angles less than 5 °, the brightness in- the "fairy castle" layer.
creased much more rapidly. This nonlinear surge 2. The I_ommel-Seeliger term cos i (cos i q- cos e)
was termed the "opposition effect." Later, a simi- for the visible shadowing within that layer, where
lar phenomenon on the Moon was noted and i is the angle of incidence and e is the angle of
measured (ref. 2-20), the brightness at 1 ° phase enlergence.
being almost 50 percent greater than at 5 ° . Prior 3. A ret rodirective function which corrects the
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 39

4f
TABLE 2-I.--Measurements of the Heiligenschein 1.4

[Film gamma al den:dry ,)f heiligenschein =:I.2: image


Oo ,
1.3 .3!
scale for ,_0qmn forus lens =(I.7. /mm]

'\ Contribution to

Distance from l']quivalen! .\lean film Equiwderil 1.2 2/' //heiligenschein


' V _," not produced
zero phase, mm degrees density bright hess

\, by shadowing
1.1 \ ....... From .1 \
{) ............ [) 1.15 1 .(}0
i heiligenschein N
I ........ • 7 I. 30 .9O
\ measurements \
I .4 1.40 • 84
_1.0
3 ............ 2.2 1.49 .78
4 ............ 2.9 1. ,)(3 .73 A:= o ?'_
3.6 l .61 .72

4.3 I. 655 •7o


7 ............ 5.0 1.69 .68
5.8 1.73 •66
_ -°.' ;

last term by allowing for the hi(ling of those


shadows at small phase angles• _ ,,,"'_'
_ e'_irt
eh`i_;lu;Iiner
'as
graeteai
ng
The expression used in reference 2-38 for this RougieCs ,/' . ......
last term is not correct, however, and a more
measurements
,:5: ................
accurate expression has now been obtained. The
author of this section ha.s also shown that an I i I I
5 10 15 20 25
excellent fit between Rougicr's results and theory
Phase angle, deg
(in ref. 2-37) can be obtaine(l by -tssuming a bulk
density of about 40 percent (60 percent porosity) Fmua}: 2 34. Rel'ttive brightness of lun,tr surfa(.e at
for the fairy-castle layer and a Lambert function various angul:tr distances from zero-phase ])oint.

for the individual particles (in the small-phase-


angle range u.sed here). By adapting the function
to the conditions of the measure(l fraines (plu_se
angle = angle of emergence; angle of incidence = I)etween 20 ° and 0 °. In the range of 5 ° through
constant at about 0°), the solid line in figure 2-34 0 °, however, an additional nonlinear brightening
is obtained. The vertical bars indicate Rougier's occurs that boosts the rcflectivity I)y "m extra
measurements of the waxing and waning Moon 35 t)ercent t)cyond the extrapolate(I zero-phase
also adapted to the preceding conditions. The value. This t)rightening is presumably similar to
heiligenschein measurements have I)een plotted the t)henomenon observe(l and reported in refer-
so that the value for 5 ° phase angle agrees with the once 2-7, and nmy 1)e caused t)y an internal
Rougier value. reflection effect an(t/or some other effect (for
As noted in reference 2-38, the steepness of the exanq)le, diffr'_ction) not yet investigated. R('-
retrodirective function depends solely upon the garding the possible translucency of the p_trtiel(_s,
bulk density of the reflecting layer. A retro- the Lambert pha._e function for the particles re-
directive function can be fitted to the heiligen- quires an a(ldition'd factor of 0.08(1 - cos q)2, where
schein peak, but it is then impossible to fit the g is t)hase angle. This may be partly an in(tication
Rougier results except by using a very peculiar of translucency. Even more interesting "tre the
and unknown phase function for the particles. recent polarimetric studies carried out, at wu'ious
In summary, the lunar heiligenschein is the wavelengths, at the Lunar an(l Planetary l,abora-
result of two distinct phenomena. Shadow-hiding tory of the University of ArizomL In these studies,
in the fairy-castle layer causes a brightening of the lunar results can be duplicated only l)y parti-
about 2.2 percent per degree for phase angles cles which (lispl.ty some degree of translucency•
40 ANALYSIS I)F APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

TtlEORETICAL PHOTOM ETRY graphic .tccomplishment of Apollo 8, from the


standpoint of photometry, is the return of the
H. A. POHN, R. L. WILDEY, AND H. W. RADIN fihn. (The imaging system also has a higher degree
of basic internal photometric integrity.) The re-
Introduction
turn of the fihn to Earth permits better calibration,
The Apollt_ 8 photographs have provide(l a more uniform processing, and a wider dynamic
wealth of data for studies of tile hmar photo- range than has been achieved in the past. The
metric function : inherent errors of indirect picture transmission
1. The first calibrated lunar photograph at less are also avoided.
than about 1.5 ° phase angle and the first obser-
vations of the heiligenschein.
2. Tile first, zero-phase photogral)hy of tile lunar
far side.
3. The best-calibrated high-resolution lunar
photography to (late.
4. The first high-resolution l)hotometric data
on original fihn.
The Apollo 8 pictures provide the first oppor-
tunity to determine the lunar photometric func-
tion in the vicinity of zero phase without ex-
trapolation. The pictures also provide the first
opportunity for an accurate determination of the
photometric function, in a single terrain unit,
over a fairly wide range of photometric angles.

Significance of Photography
Since the Earth subtends an angle of about 2 °
(diameter) at the Moon, and the Sun subtends
about 0.5 °, the closest possible approach to zero
phase for telescopic observations is about 1.5 ° at
FmURE 2-35.---Apollo 8 frame 2148, showing zero-phase
the center of the disk. (The range is from 1.25 °
point.
at the limb nearest eclipse to 1.75 ° at the far
limb, for no penumbral shadowing.) The photo-
metric function rises sharply with decreasing phase
angle in this region; therefore, the extrapolation
to zero phase is subject to error. Apollo 8 photo-
graphs are the first ones taken from lunar orbit
to contain the zero-phase point within tile range
of calibration.

Advantages of Apollo 8 Photographs Over Earlier


Data

Most earlier photometric analysis has been clone


from Earth-based telescopic photography. (Lim-
ited photoelectric observations have been carried
out.) Apollo 8 photographs have nmch higher
resolution, a much wider range of photometric
angles in a single terrain unit, and freedom from
atmospheric "seeing" effects. In comparison to Fmvur: 2 36.- Portion of Lunar Orbiter II frame M-l.q6,
earlier lun,lr missions, the paramount photo- showing loration of Apollo 8 frame 2148.
INITIAL PIIOTOGRAPf[IC ANALYSIS 41

Preliminary Resuhs more sharply with (lecreasing 1)hase angle than


was previously believed. I:mar reflec! ivil y is about
An isodensity trace of the zero-phase region of
20 percent higher at zero phase th.tn at "t 1.5 °
Apollo 8 frame 2148 (figs. 2 35 to 2 37) shows
phas(, angle. An approxinmte curve is shown in
that the photometric function increases 11111(311
figure 2 38; these results are subjecl t<) later
refinement.

PIIOTOMETRIC FUNCTION REDUCTIONS

JAMES L. DRACG .&ND IIAROLD L. PRIOR

The Apollo 8 photography offere(t the first


ol)porlunity to perform detailed ph(_tonletl'ie re-
(luciion at zero phase. (AI this con(tition, Surveyor
and Lunar ()rbiter photographs reached satura-
tion, and telescopi(: observ_dions "u'e occulted.)
Approximately 60 frames including the zero-ptmse
point were recorded on Apollo 8 mag,_zines C
an(l D, type 3400 bl.tck-an(I-white film. Six of
these frames, .ill fron:t magazine D, were selected
for a quick-look analysis: 2124, 2134, 2138, 2145,
2147, and 2149. Selection of these particular
frames was based on the following:
1. They were taken at a camer, t aperture of
f/11 where camera lens e'flibration was available
for relative transmission ()if-axis. All m.tgazine C
frames were taken at f/5.6.
FmURE 2-37.--Apollo 8 oblique frame 2751, showing lo-

cation of Apollo 8 frame 2148.

t.0

.9

E.

of brightness Iongilude (not


.7

'l
7_
.6 shownl

Function
at g • 0 °

I
begins

may

I
for
illumination
at about

not
point

I
g - 3°

be regular
source

L I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Phaseangle, g, deg

FI(;URE 2 38.--Lunar photometric function near zero FIGURE 2-39.--Apollo 8 frame 21,t7-D, showing densi-

ph,ts(,, tometer trace, princip:fl point, and zero-ph,_se point.


42 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

3.0

2"8f

2.6 _"'__--t¢licroden sitorneiertrace

1 f"
2.0 Principal point

1
1.8 Zero-phasepoint

FI(_UaE 2-40. Apollo 8 frame 2147-D master positive traces and points.

3.2
2. All frames were taken approximately verti-
cally, allowing simplified geometrical calculations
based on single densitometric scans through the
principal point and zero-phase point. Magazine C 3.0
frames were taken with a 12 ° camera pitch angle.
The principal point and zero-phase point were
located on each frame, and densitometric traces 2.8-
(figs. 2-39 and 2-40) were extracted from frame
edge to frame edge through these points. A second-
generation master positive was used for all scan- 2.6-
ning. A mean brightness trace was fitted to each
microdensitometer trace. The assumption was :.
made that variations of the microdensitometer _2.4
trace from the mean brightness trace were caused _E
by local variations in albedo and slope, and that
the mean trace corresponded to a uniform sphere 2.2
and albedo. Eighty-two data points were ex-
tracted, and the phase angle g and luminance
longitude _ computed for each data point. Con- 2.0
version of the microdensitometer data to exposures
was performed through the use of sensitometric
strip 4B (fig. 2-41) preexposed onto the head end I. 8
Absolute log E ol step Ii: 8.82-10
of the flight film. The exposures were corrected 0.15 log E relative steps
for lens transmission characteristics, but have not
i I I I I i I
been corrected for potential spacecraft-window- 1.613 12 11 10 g 8 7 6
transmission effects. The values for each frame
Step
were then normalized to zero phase.
Data points within each frame were limited to FI(_uIcE 2-41.--D log E curve for strip 4B Apollo 8

approximately 20 ° or less, both in phase angle magazine D.


INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 43

IOO

90

8O

....a = 0 °

6O

[]
/ 0

L I
-20 -10 0 I0 20
Phase angle, deg

FIGURE 2-42.--Data points for various luminance longitudes (a).

and luminance longitude. Data points and fitted kaya data, with a slightly sharper falloff from
curves are plotted (fig, 2-42) for a = 0 °, 4.7 °, 9.4 °, zero phase. This sharper falloff may be an im-

-4.7 °, -9.4 °, - 13.95 °, and - 18.1 °. The curve provement in the function, or it may be indicative
for zero a is also plotted against the JPL fits of an adjusted function for the highlands of the
(ref. 2-39) to data of Fedorets and Sytinskaya, lunar far side. The data scatter does indicate that

with all curves normalized to zero phase. The additional and more detailed reduction of this

results show (fig. 2-43) a better fit to the Sytins- type is warranted from the Apollo 8 photography.
44 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND V]SUAL ()B,SERVATIONS

lOO
Summary of Results
The terminology for the viewing conditions of
interest is illustrated in figure 2-44. For simplicity,
L, Data points from

six Apollo 8 frames only t he in-plane case is diagramed. Critical view-


9O
ing con(titions for lunar operations are those for
looking ne,_r and at the zero-phase point, for
viewing at high-Sun angles, and when the ob-
server-line-of-sight (OLOS) elevation angle OA is
8O
less than the Sun-line-of-sight (SLOS) elevation
angle 0._. The washout that occurs at the zero-
=O, Sytinskaya data
phase point and the loss of contrast that occurs
= ,
when 0_ is less than O,s have been thought to
70
present a serious problem for lunar module (LM)
%
c_ landing. [n addition, substantial differences in
surface :tppearance occur between the relatively
fiat ,tnd homogeneous smooth maria and the
6O
rougher highlands. The former, of course, are of
interest for the first three or four landing missions,
wheretts the'latter are of interest for the later
© exploration-oriented missions.
5O
The most important <)f the Apollo 8 <)bser-
\ rations are the following:
L I
1. The zero-phase washout is less severe and
0 lO 20

Phase angle more limited in size than anticipated.


2. Albe(h) differences, especially in the high=
FIGURE 2-43.--Curve for zero lumin'ince longitude plotted lands, assist visibility to a greater extent than
:_gainst Jet Propulsion Laboratory fits to Fedorets and
anticipated.
Sytinskaya d-tta.
3. I)etail could be seen in shadows.
4. Surface features couht 1)e seen under earth-
shine.
The general decrease in topographic infornmtion
VISIBILITY AND APOLLO 8 at higher Sun angles, especially relative height
PHOTOGRAPHIC RESULTS information, was much as expected. The latter is
illustrated in figure 2-45, which shows two frames
from the fourth-revolution stereoscopic strip of
K. ZIEDMAN
roughly comparable terrain for low- and high-Sun-
Introduction angle conditions. The overall flattening and loss
of terrain:height information in the high-Sun=
Visual observations by the Apollo 8 crew have angle frame is apparent; however, substantial de-
increased the knowledge of lunar-feature visi- tail can still be seen because of albedo differences.
bility. The photographic records (tocument some A washout, or zero-pha.se region, can I)e seen
of these observations aml are an additional source in figure 2 45(b). The overprinted ellipses are
of (|at'_ for studying lunar photometric functions constant phase-angle contours and indicate that
and visibility problems. The purpose of this sec- the washout, under the conditions of high-Sun
tion is to summarize the observational and photo- and nearly vertical viewing, subtends about 3 °.
graphic results as they pertain to visibility and An obvious feature of figure 2-45(b) is the many
to compare the results with previous studies and small, bright craters. A result of importance for
simulations. In particular, the question of Sun- visibility is the somewhat contradictory situation
elevation-angle constr,dnts during L._'I landing is in which these steel) craters (which should be
reviewed. •tvoided by the LM) are best seen at high Sun
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 45

Sun line of sight {SLOS) ..

•Local vertical

.. Observer eye point

Look angle (O L "Local horizontal

"'-Observer line of sight


(OLOS)
Local vertical
Aspect angle (eAI

.- Lunar surface
Observed surface point..
"Sun elevation angle (esl
Local hor izonta I.,

Radius vector Radius vector

FmuRz 2-44.--Definition of viewing situation.

FIGURE 2-45.--Equal phase angle contours from 1 °'to 10 ° for Apollo 8 frames 2124 and 2125. (a) Frame 2125, (b)
frame 2124.
46 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS
INITIALPIIOTOGRAPIIIC
ANALYSIS 47

r ....

t.

FI(_URE 2-46.--Apollo 8 photographs showing zero-phase

points. (a) Frame 2271, (b) frame 2272, (c) frame 2273,
(d) frame 2339, (e) frame 2340, (f) frame 2341, (9)

fr._me 2342, (h) frame 2818, (i) frame 2819, (j) frame

2820, (k) frame 2821.


48 ANALYSIS "(')F APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPIIY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

angles, whereas relative terrain heights and slopes Aspect angle and g for four altitudes are shown
are best seen at low Sun angles. as a function of 0L in figures 2-47 and 2-48.
Zero-phase points, or what appears to be near-
Phase angle wa.s calculated by assuming zero
zero phase, were obtained on a few frames covering phase at the surface point corresponding to 0_t of
maria regions and under conditions similar to
those of LM descent. These are frames 2271,
2272, and 2273 (magazine E) of the training se-
quence near landing site 1 (250-mm lens); 2339 90
to 2342 (magazine E), taken near Mare Fecundi-
8O
tatis (80-mm lens); and 2818, 2819, 2820, and
2821 (magazine C), with a near-zero-phase point
70
in Mare Tranquillitatis (80-mm lens). This set of
photographs is shown in figure 2-46 and is dis- 60
cussed further in the section of this chapter en-
titled "Simulation of Lunar Module Photography 50
and Lunar Module Landing Conditions."

Discussion

Comparison of Orbital and LM-Descent Viewing


Conditions

The nominal landing point during LM descent


is seen at a 16 ° aspect angle 0A measured from 10_ 0b_rver a.t,tudeIn. mi. ,_ __'_ 1 10
the local horizontal at the landing point to the
90 80 lO 60 50 40 30 20 10 0
line of sight to the LM. Thus, it is appropriate eL
to examine the Apollo 8 visual observations and
photographs for conditions which include surface FIGURE 2-47.--Aspect angle versus look angle for four
altitudes (in-plane geometry).
regions viewed at aspect angles in the neighbor-
hood of 16 °, particularly for the cases when the
scene includes the zero-phase or near-zero-phase
80-
points. Referring to figure 2--44, the look angle
OL is defined as the deviation of the OLOS from 70
the spacecraft local horizontal. This angle is the
quantity which an observer would use to describe 60
the angular size or direction of surface features.
To compare the LM-descent and orbital viewing 50
conditions, the manner in which two angles, the
4O
phase and aspect angles, vary as a function of OL
at the two altitudes is compared. The aspect angle
30
is a measure of foreshortening, an important degra-
Observer
dation factor for high-oblique viewing. The phase
20 _'_ ,,'20 altitude,
angle g is also related to visibility. The question
posed is whether the region enclosed by a given g 10 ,10

or a given 0A would subtend a substantially differ-


O- " ,1
ent OL between orbital and high-gate altitudes.
If these cases are indeed different, a washout -10
region defined in terms of OL from 60 n. mi. will 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10
be a different size compared to a washout region eL
also defined in terms of 0L, but from an altitude of
FIGURE 2-48.--Phase angle versus look angle for four
1 or 2 n. mi.
altitudes (in-plane geometry).
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 49

nation based on the fact th:tt the ('rew was .tble


16°; that is, for Oa= 16 °, Os = 16 °. To cOlUl)are the
effect of altitude, exaniine the change that occurs to observe detail; that is, the surface lun_inan('e
in Oa as OL is varied around the OL value corre- nmst have been greater than the visual threshol(t
for visibility in a (lark area surrounded by a
Sl)onding to 0A=16 °. (At 1 n. nit., 0L=15°; at
60 n. mi., 0L= 25°.) It is clear th'tt the 0.4 change larger, brighter area.
Related to this question is the problenl of com-
correspouding to, for example, a _+5 ° OL variation
is quite different between altitu(tes of 1 anti 60 paring the dynamic range of film and of the eye.
n. mi. The difference is greatest l[ownrange of i number of comments have been ma(lc (_oncern-

the 16 ° 0a point; substantial foreshortening of ing the Apollo 8 results to the effect that the eye
surface features occurs beyond this l)oint for the has a greater dynamic range than film. Such
comments -ire misleading unless the ,lctual con-
higher altitude. In fact, the horizon is reached .'Lt
OL=20 ° at 60 n. mi. This results in poorer visi- ditions of measurement are specified, such as type

bility of features at 60 n. nit. comt)ared to 1 n. mi., of fihn, granularity, D log E curve, and type of
relative to their visibility at OA= 16 ° when viewing criteria (such as discriminable gray steps or re-
down range of that point. Note also that the abso- solvable detail) by which the film and visual
lute value of 0L to the 0A = 16 ° point increases dynaInie ranges are me:_sured. Visual dynanfic
about 10 ° between 60 and 1 n. mi. range is often described by the total operating
A plot of g versus OL corresponding to the pre- range of the visual system for t he lowest threshold
ceding conditions (zero phase set at 0A =16 ° for for seeing t.o the point at which light intensity
all altitudes) is shown in figure 2-48. For this will cause pain or dam'tge. This description is
case, the variation of 9 about the zero-phase inappropriate as a basis for comparison to fihn
point is the same at each altitude for a given OL sensitivity. Although the eye can operate over tl
variation. The only change is a (lisplacement of range of IO ta, it cannot (to so at any one time.
the function along the 8L axis of an amount equal At a given time, the eye has a single operating
to the central angle between the zero-phase points point, and the variation in light level around the
for the various altitudes. operating point to which it responds is sub-
The importance of these comments is in the stantially smaller than the total rangc of 10 TM.
fact that observing the lunar surface at a OA of The operating point itself is determined by the
16 ° from 60 n. mi. does not effectively simulate adaptation luminance to which the eye is exposed.
the LM landing situation, due to the foreshorten- The adaptation level is a weighted function of the
ing effect. At this altitude, a series of photographs luminance distribution in the visual field, and can
that include the zero-phase point for Sun elevation roughly be taken "_s the average luminance. De-
angles from about 10 ° to 30 ° is required to cover pending on the adaptation level, the eye may have
the range of conditions during LM landing. a dynamic range greater or smaller than a given
film-development combination. In the case of
seeing in shadows, the eye has an advantage over
Shadow Visibility and Visual Dynamic Range film in that: it can adapt to the clark and, therefore,
become more sensitive if the shadow region is
The demonstration of visibility in shadow re- observed over a time period.
gions has implications for lunar surfa(_e operations The amount of light in a shadow region needed
and for future lunar photography. Shadow regions for visibility was bounded by examination of two
have been considered a potential hazard for sur- criteria :
face extravehicular activity and for LM and flier
1. What luminance level is necessary to raise
operations, because holes in shadows or pro-
the brightness of a snmll clark spot just above
tuberances covered by shadows might not be de-
complete black when it is seen against a larger,
tected. The luminance in the shadow observed
bright surround? This is the minimum luminance
from Apollo 8 is presumably caused by back-
necessary to perceive anything in .t shallow and
scatter from adjacent illuminated areas. This effect
can be considered a noise level.
is especially evident in shadows within craters.
An estimate can be made of the amount of illumi- 2. What luminance level is necessary to see
50 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

detail inside a dark spot bounded by a larger, lumens/ftL Entering this value on the ordinate
bright surround? This criterion will require a of figure 2-48, a just=visible luminance of 0.3 to
greater luminance than the first and can be used 0.56 ft-L is obtained, or about 0.001 to 0.002 of
as an upper estimate. the surround luminance.
As is usually the case, such threshold values To estimate the luminance required for detailed
will depend on many parameters: the angular size visibility, the size and contrast of the detail should
and luminance of the surround; the angular size be specified. Unfortunately, thLs cannot be done
of the dark area; the angular size and contrast without additional information from the crew as
of the critical detail for the second criterion; and to visible feature size. However, an experiment
the specific judgment required of the observer. described in reference 2-42 can serve to set an
To correlate with Apollo 8 observations, a sur- upper luminance level for small detail. Subjects
round should be used that subtends at least 20 ° in that experiment estimated orientation of
to 30 ° at the eye and a dark area should be used Landolt "C" ring of the following dimensions:
that simulates a shadow that subtends 2 ° to 5 °. outside diameter =9.65 minutes of arc, stroke and
The size of features visible to the crew in the gap width= 1.93 minutes of arc. Contrast ratios
shadow is not known to this author. were determined for various background and sur-
Data from reference 2-40 approximate the con- round luminances and sizes using the following
ditions necessary for estimating the first criterion. equation :
From a 180 ° surround with a 1.5 ° dark area, the
Lr- LB
just-visible luminance in the 1.5 ° area was de- Contrast ratio C-
termined as a function of surround luminance. LB

The results are shown in figure 2-49. Also plotted where Lr = target luminance for 50 percent correct
are the results obtained in reference 2-41 for a judgments and LB = background luminance.
somewhat different type of experiment, although For a background (or shadow) size of 5 ° and a
these results agree well with the reference 2-40 surround luminance of 17'6 ft-L, the following
data in the region of interest. At a 10 ° 0s, the contrast thresholds were found for 50 percent
average luminance of the lunar surface is 325 ft-L correct judgments: at a shadow luminance of
for viewing vertically, assuming an overall re- 18.7'3 ft-L, C=0.25; at a shadow luminance of
flectance factor of 0.1, a reflectance of 0.25 along 1.57 ft-L, C = 1.5. Because lunar=feature contrasts
the line of sight, and solar illumination of 13 000 in shadows are likely to be on the order of a few
tenths or less, it is concluded that shadow lumi-
nance would have to be on the order of 10 ft-L
2[- for detection of small detail. This detail size is
tI- probably unrealistic; critical feature size was more
likely in the region of 10 to 20 minutes of arc,
, -1t-
oF Stevj in which case a tenfold reduction in threshold to
-2I- about 1 ft-L is reasonable.

= -'r
_' 4
,g."
-3
J
-2 -i
I
0
I I
i
I
2 3
[ I
4 5
I
It is concluded
greater
that shadow luminance was
than 0.6 ft-L and less than 1 to 10 ft-L
"" LO surround luminance, for 325-ft-L average lunar surface luminance. Be-
ft- L

,Beam splitter
_.. F-'--'_-'- 35-ramcamera
Central Solarsimulator "_"-]__ 28-mm-focal-length
",_I,, For a given surround
area Surround source, angular _ lens
diameter diameter /",, ' "_ luminance, the just- subtense : 0.5 + " I _ .- Source elevation
Stevens 5.1 c 58° "i'_ _visible luminance in _--"_ angle
"-" J the central area
Lowry 1.5 ° 180°
\ J (analogous to shadow) 1:25,000scalemodel
was determined of site 3

FIGURE 2-49.--Just-visible luminance as a function of


FIGURE2-50.--Viewing conditions for zero-phase photo-
surround luminance. graphs of lunar-surface model.
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 51

cause visual threshold contrast ratios are nearly


constant in the range from 10- to 1000-ft-L sur-
round luminance, the ratios of 0.6/325=0.002
and 10/325 = 0.031 can be used to estimate shadow
luminances for other surround values.
It must be emphasized that the threshold values
are greatly affected by target contrast and size,
which are unknown. However, these estimates
are believed sufficiently accurate to establish film
exposure conditions for photographing in the
shadows. A further conclusion is that the standard
lunar photometric functions, measured with an
essentially collimated source subtending a small
angle, may be inappropriate for determining
shadow luminance and contrasts in shadows, be-
cause the shadow area is illuminated diffusely.

Lunar Surface Simulation

Simulations of the lunar surface for visibility


studies have been of two types:
1. Analytical, using a lunar photometric" model.
2. Physical, using a model dusted with copper
oxide or portland cement.
An attempt was made to compare the appear-
ance of a copper-oxide-dusted model with Apollo 8
photographs under high Sun illumination. Photo-
graphs of a 1:25 000-scale model (8 by 12 in.) of
landing site 3 were taken under the conditions
shown in figure 2-50. The results are shown in
figure 2-51 for 90 °, 80 °, and 70 ° Sun angles and
a vertical view angle. In this figure, the camera
line of sight is normal to the model center. Also
shown are Apollo 8 frames with corresponding
Sun angles. It can be seen that the model appear-
ance and washout extent are similar for the two
cases, allowing for the uniform albedo and relative
smoothness of the model.

EVALUATION OF PHOTOCLINOMETRIC
PROFILE DERIVATION

B. K. LUCCHITTA AND N. A. GAMBELL

Origin of the Study


The availability of Apollo 8 vertical stereo-
scopic-pair photography (magazine D, type 3400
film) of the Moon led to an opportunity to com-
FIGURE 2-51.--Lunar surface model dusted with copper
pare slopes derived by photometric methods with
oxide (landing site 3). (a) Sun elevation 90% (b) Sun
elevation 80 °, (c) Sun elevation 70 °. slopes derived by photogrammetric methods.
5_ ANALYSIs ()1,' AI'[)LL() S PIIOTOGRAPIIY AND VISUAL ()BSERVATIONS

Procedure Selection of Photograph

Geometric and b'ihn Parameters The vErtical stereoscopic-pair photographic


coverage of the Moon extended approximately
Because of the shor! lime av'dlabh, for the from 80 ° E to 150 ° W along the back side. The
photometric an'tlysis, the ('onll)uter progranl (ref. pholograI)hS near the terminator (approxinmtely
2-43) for slope derivation from lmn:w ()rbiter 150 ° W) were unsuitable for elinometry because
pictures (on 35-ram GRI+, fihn) was too(tiffed and of large shadow areas; those near tile limb (90 ° E)
used. [;sing vertical photogral)hy (0 ° tilt), _ the were unsuitable because of small phase angles.
following parameters qre necess:try ['or the compu- Frame 2082 (magazine D, Kodak Panatomic X
tations : aerial, lype 3400 film) at a scale of 1:1 375 000
1. Longitude -tnd ltLtitude of the center of the was selected as showing sufficient detail for photo-
frame (70-ram film). metric analysis. The scanning was clone on a
2. Altitude of the camera lens at)ore the surface. fourth-generation positive.
3. l)eviation front north ('ingle between groun(t
Obtaining Parameters
north and picture-framE Eoordinate system).
4. Sun angle (sol.tr elevation). The focal lEngth (80 lnnt), Sun angle (35°),
5. Longitude an(t latitude of the subsolar point. a lt itude of the spacecraft (1 l 0 kin), aml exposure
6. X- and Y-coordinates (picture-framE coor(li- v'duEs for l he calibration gray scale were obtained
nate system) of the zero-phase point. from the support data books. (Reference app. A
7. Focal length of the lens. of this (tocument for further information.) The
8. Location of the initi-d point of the area to -q)proxinrLte latitude an(t longitude of the nadir
be scanned in picture-frame coordinates. point were "tvailable in the chart of footprints of
9. Scan angle (angle between the trace of the t he l)hol ogr'_phy.
phase plane anti the X-'txis of the picture-frame A(htitional parameters were obtained or "_p-
coordinate system). proxinmted in the following manner:

10. Exposure values for the c'dibration gr'ly More l)reeise latitude and longitude were de-
scale (Apollo 8 type 3400 fihn). rived from Lunar Orbiter photography by image
11. Density values for the gray scale of the matching, using Lunar Orbiter II frame H-33.
fourth-generation, 70-ram, type 3400 film. The north (leviation angle was obtained by the
12. Shutter speed of c'unera for the picture same method. Thus, the values used were (1)
used. 174.3 ° E, (2) !).9 ° S, and (3) 183 ° N deviation
angle (as defined in ref. 2-44).
Format and _Vlierodensitometer Parameters The l'ttitude and longitude of tile subsolar point
are necessary for calculating the coordinates of
The following format is require([ in the program
the zero-p]mse point. To obtain these quantities,
from reference 2-43:
the exael time at which the photograph was taken
1. Chit area of approximately 20 mm by 8 mm
has to be known. The time was approximated to
(20 mm along thE phase line).
within an hour (1) by knowing the orbit number,
2. Fifteen parallel scans along traces of thE
the position at which the picture was taken, and
phase planes (scans 0.6 mm apart).
3. Up to 500 points per scan.
4. Phase angle between 40 ° and 110 °.
TABLE 2-II.--Joyce-Loebl MK CS Micro-
5. Machine parameters as given in table 2 II.
densitometer Parameters
6. A nfinitape, onto which the density levels
Condenser, mm ....................... 32
•Lre coded in 168 steps (binary eo(le(t (te('imal).
Optieal rnagnifiealion faclor. ........... 2()
Mechanical magnification factor ....... 10
Vertical aperlure, mm ................. 1.5
l [[)rizonta] aperl ure, rnln .............. l ..3
Spot size, mm ..................... 0.075 by 0.075
[n the case of c'tmera-axis lilt, a(hliti(mal parameters Wedge, dem, ily units ................. F 140,0to2.4
are ile(!essary for the ('onll)uHtli[)ns. l';ne,,der levels ...................... 1--168
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPIIIC ANALYSIS 53

TABLE 2-III.--Gray Scale Calibration Values (Magazine D Positive)

Step Exposm'e values Relative density values Bright hess values

1 .................................... 0.083 2.1967 263.291


2 .................................... .105 2•1605 332.278
3 .................................... •121 2.0760 382.911
4 .................................... • 152 1.9312 481.013

5 .................................... • 182 1•6898 575•949

6 .................................... .219 1,3036 693.038

7 .................................... •276 .7846 886.076

8 .................................... .324 .313g 1025.316


9 .................................... • 408 .0121 1291.139

the time required for one orbit; and (2) from the 2. The correct exposure values for the Apollo 8
orbit number, position, and time of -1 television fihn (type 3400) gray scale had to be substituted.
transmission to Earth. Knowing the time, the 3. A scale conversion front 70-mm to 35-ram
coordinates of the subsolar point were interpolated fihn had to be eliminated.
from ephemeris data for 1968. A supporting con>
puter program established the picture-frame co- Results
ordinates of the zero-phase point and the scan
Comparison With Photogrammetric Profiles
angle. Because of a Lunar Orbiter scale conversion
Obtained From the A P/ C Plotter
in the computer program, the scan angle was
erroneously established as 4 ° (measured clockwise Figure 2-52 shows an outline of the area
from the X-axis). Although it was not used, the scanned. The initial point is at the northeast
correct scan angle was later established as being
10 °. The coordinates of the initial point were
measured with the Mann comparator on the 70-
ram film. The density values of the calibration
gray scale were calculated from microdensitometer
scans. It was found convenient to use a density
of 0.3 as a base for the measurements. Nine steps
of the gray scale were used for the density-to-
brightness conversion (table 2 III).

Scanning of the Area and Computer Program


Modification
The chit area was scanned on the microdensi-
tometer, and the coded data were put on tape,
which was processed in the 360/65 computer as
specified in the reference 2-43 program. The fol-
lowing modifications had to be made on the pro-
cedure and the computer program in order to
meet the specifications of the 70-ram spacecraft
film as opposed to the normally used 35-ram GRE
Lunar Orbiter film:
1. A correction scan across the orbiter framelet
width (correcting errors introduced through tele- FIGURE 2-52.--Apo110 8 frame 2082, area of comparison of
vision lines) had to l)e omitted. photoclinometric profiles with photogrammetric profiles.
54 ANALYS[S
()FAP()LL()
8 PH()'I'O(;IcAPIIY
ANI)VISUAl,
()HSEH,
VATI()NS

('orner ()f the (_utlin('d "u'ea. Th(, sc,annitlg (lirection rehdively flat, with gentle ups "ul(t (Iowns ((m
ix toward th(, n(n'thwest. Tol)ogr;q)hic profiles of the ord(,r _Jf 400 meters) amt some dropoff tow'tr(I
the 15 scans (fgs. 2 53 IHI([ 2 54) were ])l(_tt(,(| the, (,n(l. The l:lst scans (south side of picture)
on th(' XYZ t)l()tt(,r at "t scale of 1:100 000. The show a (h'finit(, rise over the rim of the crater
first few scans ;tt the north si{t(, ()f the ph()togral)h (1200 nteters). Ph(_t()granimetrie profiles 'dong the
show a relatively fiat er:d(,r bottoni with a slight sam(, t)lan(, al_ng scan 1, al)proxinmt(,ly scan 8,
rise (approximat(,ly 600 met(,rs) ovc,r th(, ('rat(,r :tn([ scan 15 (fig. 2 55) were provided by the
rim, "u_d 't marked (]ropoff (atq)r(_xinmtely -300 AP/(' t)lott(,r. In a comparis(nl ])etwoen the
meters) at th(, ('tl(]. Th(, interm(,di'd(, srm_s are m('tho(l_, scan 15 (fig. 2-56) shows good agreement

_ 1500
•- _ 100o f

,aJ
50o

J
__13

_8

_7

_6

_4

_3

_" ,,, 1500 _2


_ 1000

5o
8
--Initial point
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I l I I J I
0 2 4 6 8 lO 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Ground distance, kilometers

FI(;URE 2-53.--Profiles of 15 scans l)lotted rm X YZ plotter.


INITIAL PHOTOGRAPtIIC ANALYSIS 55

between tile two profiles. Scan 1 was tilted to Comparison of Slopes From Lunar Orbiter Frame
adjust the slightly rising, fiat crater floor to .dmost H 33, Framelet 739, With Slopes From Apollo 8
horizont'd "rod shows a marked diversi<m in tile Frame 2082-D
elevati(m of the riln and in the area outside the
crater. Scan 8, when tilted to fit the equivalent An area lying within the site scalmed on Apollo
t)hotogrannnetric scan, shows some agreement in 8 fihn w'ts scalmed on Lun,u" Orbiter II fihn in an
snmll scale features t>ut is too h,w in the begimfing effort to coral)are slopes. Figure 2-57 shows the
and in the end. location of both sites. The large outline shows the
Apolh) 8 area scanned on frame 2082-D. Un-
fortunately, the <tifferenees in scale of the photo-
1600
gral)hs m'_ke conlparison difficult. Plmtometrie
_ 1200 reduction of the site on Imnar Orbiter II fr'une
_ 800 M 33 was impossible because of the extreme con-
trasts in brightness. Figure 2-58 shows plots from
_ 4oo!
o 15
scans Inade on H-33 and the corresponding parts
14
froln scans limde <m fralne 2082. Scan 15 (Lunar
Orbiter photogral)h) should .tpproxinmte scan 13
(Apolh) photograph), while scan 1 should be
equivalent to scan 10.

Et_luation

The photoclinomctric profiles start at, a relative


zero elevation at each scan, and the heights are
integrated over the entire length so that errors
are aceulnulated. The measure<t points along the
scan line are approximately 75 meters apart, and
the computer progr'lm furnishes elevation differ-
ences to '_ fraction of a meter. At the scale of the
scanned area, this precision represents noise of
the systent. To get more precision, reflecting small
features, a small area would have to be Scanned
on 'm enlargement. This enlargenlent would have
to be of very high quality in order not to lose reso-
lution at the high spati'd frequencies. An alterna-
tive way to inere'tse precision is to scan a small
•trea with a decreased spot size and increased fre-

ii -"Initial point "_1


quency
the reduced
nmltiplier
method
of points "dong the scan line. However,
signal-to-noise ratio of the photo-
tube at low light levels may render this
unsuitaDle.
Errors in the photoclinolnetric slope derivation
reported here may be caused by two main factors:
1. The use of a computer program written for
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 Lunar Orbiter photography; or
Ground distance, kilometers
2. The lack of some data (usually geometric)

FIGUI_.E 2 54.--Profiles of 15 scans plotted on XYZ plotter,


that are essential to photoclinometry.
5X vertical exaggeration. The colnputer program in reference 2-43 was
56 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

2OO0
1500
1000
5OO 1:1
0

a_ _3
E
Equivalent to photoclinometry scan 15
o looo
800
1:5
600-

400-

200
I

1500
1000
500 .... 11 2
0 _ ../-
C

._o 1000 _Zotoclinometry scan 8


¢' 800

600

40O
_ 1:5
200

1._0-
1000
500 _- _ _ 1:1
0

C 1

E 1000 1:5
d
._o 800
merry scan 1
o_ 600
oJ

4O0

200

I J I I I I 1 I I I l I I I I b l ] I I I I I I ] I
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
(3round distance, kilometers

F[(_URE 2-55.-- Comt)arison of photogranmmtric profiles and photoclinometric scans,


INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 57

2000

1800

1600

1400 _Scan 3
_n

_ 12oo
E

g 1000

800
w
6OO

400

200

5 I0 15 20 z_
(a) Ground distance, kilometers

1800

1600

1400 Scan 2

1200
-- / Scan _ 8
E 1000
c"
/ .-_/__'/_'/ _ Photogrammetry
800

4OO
Photochnometry
200

0 j L I / i
,,,I t L L I I I I I I i i i I ] 1 L I L L [ I
5 10 15 20 25
(b} Ground distance, kilometers

1600

1400 _-- _ Scan 1


1200
C

1000 / Photogrammetry
£
o
800 / __ ---.. Photoclinometry
000 // _ _.
40O
-- _ /" k-- Scan 1
200 f _ -- "" J" _"--

I_ I L I L l 1 I _',-.i i
5 10 15 20 25
{c) Ground distance, kilometers

FIGURE 2-56.--Photogrammetric profiles compared with three photoclinometric scans. (a) Photogrammetrie scan 3 and
photoclinometric scan 15; (b) photogrammetric scan 2 and photoclinometric approximately scan 8; (c) photogram-
metric scan I and photoclinometric scan I.
58 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

tr written for high- and medium-resolution Lunar


Orbiter photographs, mainly of the landing sites
! where low relief is predominant and small features
are of interest. The application of this program
to high-altitude, 70-ram Apollo 8 photography
introduces errors which may be related to the
following problems:
1. At the scale of Apollo 8 magazine D pho-
tography, variations in albedo are present in the
4 photograph, but they are not corrected for in the
computer program.
FIGUI_E2-57.--Portion of Lunar Orbiter II frame H-33,
2. Lunar Orbiter chit areas, as commonly used
showing areas of photoclinometric comparison.
for photoclinometry, involve phase-angle changes
of less than 0.5 ° for high-resolution frames and
approximately 3 ° for medium-resolution frames.
The Apollo 8 film chit area spans 14 ° of phase-
g _, 500= angle change.
3. The phase angles involved in the Apollo 8
photograph approach the lower limit of the phase-
angle range set in the photoclinometry program.
Midrange phase angles in magazine D photo-
graphs are not suitable for photoclinometric meth-
ods, because they occur on the back side of the
Moon, where the roughness of the terrain results
in large areas of shadow.
4. Erroneous interpretation of slope will have
a large effect on integrated heights over a hori-
zontal separation between points of 75 meters in
exaggeration
5Xvertical _
the Apollo 8 photograph as opposed to a sepa-
LunarOrbiter
frameH-33,]-[ _ 400 ', ration between points of only 0.6 meter in high-
resolution Lunar Orbiter photographs.
framelet73g _ /00_1_)0" 5. The photometric function used in the com-
puter program may not be correct for the back
/Portions of profiles side of the Moon.
/ lakenfrom Apollo8
l frame2080 Additional causes for error may be found in
one of the following areas:

1. Altitude given as 110 km may not be precise.


2. The time at which the photograph was taken
S was not accurately known; therefore, the latitude
and longitude of the subsolar point may not be
correct.
3. The photograph is assumed to be vertical.
- L__scan 1 ,//
An unrecorded tilt may be present.
4. The latitude and longitude of features on the
_Eg_5°°___ J
back side of the Moon are not accurately known.
"" o 8000
5. The scan angle used was not accurate.
Grounddistance, kilometers
6. Calibration errors and loss of detail in the
FIGURE 2-58.--Scan comparison of Lunar Orbiter II frame photographs may be introduced through the
H-33, framelet 739, and Apollo 8 frame 2082. fourth-generation film used.
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 59

Vertical Resolution of Slope Profiles SELENODESY AND


CARTOGRAPHY
The maximum vertical resolution of slope pro-
files can be calculated if the slope and the distance EVALUATION OF THE PHOTOGRAPHY
between successive points (approximately 75
meters) are known. Slopes of up to 7 ° would D. W. G. ARTHUR
therefore have a vertical resolution of approxi-
Although the Apollo 8 photography was not taken
mately 1 meter; slopes of up to 5 °, approximately for selenodetic purposes, the photographs have
7 meters; slopes of up to 20 °, approximately 26 some selenodetic applications. The small-scale
meters; and slopes of up to 30 °, approximately
photographs--frames 2473, 2474, 2484, 2485, 2491,
43 meters. Most slopes in Apollo 8 frame 2082 lie
2505, and 2506 (magazine B)--are exposed from
below 20 °.
a direction (in the lunar frame of reference) which
This vertical resolution is a theoretical limit
is quite new. Furthermore, the photographs cover
which cannot be attained practically because of sufficient area to determine without orbital data
errors in the photometric function, the albedo,
the spacecraft location from the photograph. The
the density-to-brightness conversion, and noise
photographs have approximately the same reso-
in the scanning system.
lution as the plates taken at the Paris Observa-
tory. These plates have had extensive selenodetic
Applications of Photoclinometry
application. Therefore, in spite of the small scale,
Profiles derived by photoclinometric methods these Apollo 8 photographs have some selenodetic
may be useful as an expression of topographic applications when used in conjunction with Earth-
relief in the absence of stereoscopic photography. based lunar photography. The same photographs
When detailed topographic data are required be- have some usefulness for provisional mapping of
low the contour interval of a photogrammetric part of the averted lunar hemisphere.
map, these data may be supplied by photo- The high obliques--frames 2796 to 2819 and
clinometry under the conditions previously out- 2744 to 2759 (magazine C), and frames 2187,
lined. The photoclinometric profiles should be 2189, and 2202 to 2214 (magazine D)--have good
referenced to photogrammetric control points. cartographic possibilities, as do the steeper
Also, the photoclinometric data are useful for obliques, frames 2263 to 2266 (magazine E). The
statistical estimates of terrain roughness if a rela- value of this photography will increase as more
tively high precision in the recorded heights has photographs are obtained from other directions.
been achieved.
APOLLO 8 CONTROL POINTS
Advantages of Apollo 8 Photography
RICHARD L. NANCE
Photoclinometrically, Apollo 8 photography is
superior to Lunar Orbiter photography for the For Apollo 8, a target for optical sightings on
following reasons: the lunar far side was called a control point (CP).
1. In Lunar Orbiter photography, the size of Three control points were selected before the
the area scanned by the microdeasitometer is flight to make sightings easier. The control point
limited by the framelet boundaries. identified as CP-1 was located 20 ° from the
2. Each Lunar Orbiter framelet contains its evening terminator and CP-2 was located 60 °
own sensitometric data, which must be calibrated. from the evening terminator. The control point
3. The Lunar Orbiter framelets contain er- identified as CP-3 was located 60 ° from the morn-
roneous density variations as a result of the trans- ing terminator. The command module pilot
mission procedure used to reconstitute the images (CMP) exercised an option of selecting sighting
from the Lunar Orbiter spacecraft film. targets in real time and selected new targets for
Using Apollo film, sensitometric calibration data CP-1 and CP-2. These control points can be
need to be calculated only once for all of the positively identified on Apollo 8 photography (figs.
frames in a magazine. Density corrections for 2-59 and 2-60), and the same points were probably
television lines are eliminated. sighted on all three revolutions.
60 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

FIGURE 2-59.--Control point 1.

FIGURE 2-61. --Control point :], showing points 1, 2, and 3.

differences could lie seen, which made it difficult


to identify the preselected CP. A bright spot
(a crater with very high albedo) wa_s sighted on
revolution 6. During revolution 6, sextant pho-
tography was taken while sighting. Based on this
photography, point 2 in fgure 2-61 wa.s probably
sighted on (luring revolution 6. The poor visibility
made it difficult to reacquire the same feature on
revolution 7 as was sighted on revolution 6. Since
sextant photography calmot lie taken when the
sextant is use(l for sighting, there is no sextant
photography for revolution 7 to help in identifi-
cation. Based <in the different t)ositions obtained
FIGURr: 2-60.--Control point 2.
on revolution 6 as compare(t to revolution 7 and
t)a._ed on similarity of alt)edo patterns, point 3 in
Sightings on CP-3 were made on revolutions figure 2 61 wt_s possit)ly sighted on during revo-
6 and 7. On revolution 6, the position of CP-3, lution 7. hlcntification of l)oint 3 is less certain
which was selected preflight (point 1 in fig. 2-61), than ])oint 2. Because identification of CP-3 w'_s
was entered into the onboard computer. The difficult in real time and even more difficult on
optics were then automatically driven to view photogr,q)hy postflight, the identification of CP-3
this location. Because of the high Sun angle at is uncertain. Therefore, a lower level of c<)nfidence
this location and because tile Sun line was so exists in the position of CP-3 than in that of
close to the line of sight, t)rimarily only albed<) ('P-1 and (!P-2.
61
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPIIIC ANALYSIS

TABLE 2 IV,--Apollo 8 Control-Point Positions (Preliminary)

I,.ditude, deg • Longil ude, (leg _ Radius, km


Control poin!

- 6.2537 -- 158.0650 1742.336


CP-1 (average, revolutions 5, 6, and 7) .. I
-9.7016 +163.2246 1738.093
CP-2 (average, revolutions 5, 6, and 7) ....................
--8.9229 +97.1466 1739.524
CP-3, revolution 6, pt 2 .................................
- 8.9167 +96.8883 1737.464
CP-3, revolulion 7, l)t 3 ..................................

The sign convention used is that N la! and E long are posilive.

of an orbit determination to locate the conmmnd


Front Apollo S data, the positions obtained for
the three control points, which may be used in module (CM) and a program to locate the land-
mark relative to the CM. The former program
mapping the lun'tr far si<te, are shown in table
2 IV. Onboard ot)tical sightings by the crew pro- uses Doppler tracking data, and the latter uses
vide the basis for checking the positional accuracy shaft and trunnion angles, which were measured
of lmmr charts compiled from small-scale t)ho- with the onboard optical tracking instruments.
It is possible to determine the positions both of
tography. Photogrammetric re<luctions will extend
the CM and of landmarks from optical tracking
these results, :is will subsequent Apollo missions.
(tata. In Apollo 8, the instruments used were the
As compared with positional d,da availal)le be-
scanning telescope (SCT), on revolutions 5 and 6,
fore Apollo 8, there was a great improvement in
and the sextant, on revolution 7.
the accuracy of the t)ositions of these features.
The I)ositions (table 2-V) of these three features
These positions were derive(t froill a combination

TABLE 2-V.--Apollo 8 Control-Point Map Positions


[CP-1 and CP-2]

CP-1 CP-2

LIl lllir nlal)


Latitude, Longitude, Latitude, Longitude,
°S °W °S °E

Army Map Service tAMS), Lunar Equatorial Zone Mosaic (LEZ),


05.00 158.50 09.50 163.90
1:2 500 000, 1968 ............................................
05.80 158.40 10.40 163.70
ACIC Apollo Lunar Orbit Chart (ALO), 1:11 000 000, 1st ed., 1968...
05.80 158.50 10.40 163.40
ACIC Apollo Lunar Orbital Map (LOM), 1:7 500 0OO, 1st ed., 1968 ....
05.65 158.50 10.30 163.30
ACIC Lunar Farside Chart (LFC-1), 1:5000000, 2d ed., 1967 .......

[CP-3]

Point 1 Point 2 Point 3

Lunar maI) Longitude,


Latitude, Longitude, Latitude, Longitude, Latitude,
°E °S °E
°S °E °S

_.MS LEZ (eastern limb), sheet 3


95.90 9.22 95.55
09.00 96.35 9.08
of 4 ..........................
95.80 9.10 95.55
08.80 96.1O 9.05
__CIC/ALO .................... 95.30
9.05 95.75 9.20
08.80 96.20
_CIC/LOM ................... 95.67
8.77 96.07 8.83
09.05 96.10
A_CIC/LFC 1 ..................
62 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

were scaled from sheets from the four map series (ACIC) value in table 2-VI is from reference
(refs. 2-45 to 2-48) which cover the lunar far side.
2-47. In the last row of table 2-VI, the Army
References 2-45, 2-46, and 2-47 are carried Map Service (AMS) and ACIC maps iire com-
on board Apollo missions and are used for a pared. As shown in table 2-VI, the largest differ-
gross form of navigation, to locate photographic ence is 1.58 °. Although it is realized that three
targets, and to locate targets for optical sightings, points are a small sample from which to develop
respectively. Reference 2-48 is used for planning statistical parameters, the positional uncertainty
purposes. (1 sigma) of the maps should be estimated a_u not
To compare the positions, the Apollo 8 values larger than 2 ° (60 kin). The estimated uncertainty
were subtracted from the map values (table 2-VI). used prior to Apollo 8 was 10 ° (300 km).
The Aeronautical Chart and Information Center In addition to the three control points located

TABLE 2-VI.--Compar/son of Apollo 8 and Map Positions

Comparison Latitude
Difference Longitude I Difference

CP-1

AMS (Apollo 8) ......................... -05.00 ° (-06.25 °) +1.25 ° -- 158.50 ° ( -- 158.06 o) --0.44 °


ACIC (Apollo 8) ........................ -05.80 ° (-O6.25 o) +.45 ° -- 158.50 ° ( -- 158.06 o) - .44 °
AMS (ACIC) ........................... --O5.O0° (-O5.8O °) +.80 ° -- 158.50 o ( -- 158.50 o) .00 °

CP-2

AMS (Apollo 8) ......................... -09.50 ° (-09.70 °) +0.20 ° + 163.90 ° ( + 163.22 °) +0.68 °


ACIC (Apollo 8) ........................ - 10.40 ° ( -09.70 °) _ .70 ° + 163.40 ° ( + 163.22 °) +.18 °
AMS (ACIC) ........................... -09.50 ° ( - 10.40 ¢) + .90 ° +163.90 ° (+163.40 °) +.50 °

CP-3, point 2, revolution 6

AMS (Apollo 8) ......................... --9.08 ° (--8.92 °) -0.16 ° +95.90 ° (+97.14 °) -- 1.24 °


ACIC (Apollo 8) ........................ - .13 °
-- 9.05 ° (-- 8.92 °) +95.75 ° (+97.14 °) - 1.39 °
AMS (ACIC) ........................... --9.08 ° (--9.05 °) - .03 o +95.90 ° (+95.75 °) - .15 o

CP-3, point 3, revolution 7

AM8 (Apollo 8) .......................... -9.22 ° (-8.91 °) -0,31 ° +95.55 ° (+96.88 °) -- 1.33 °


ACIC (Apollo 8) ......................... --9.20 ° (-8.91 °) - .29 o +95.30 ° (+96.88 °) - 1.58 °
AMS (ACIC) ............................ _ .02 °
--9.22 ° (--9.20 °) +95.59 ° (+95.30 °) +.29 °

Landmark B-1

+02.52 ° ( +02.53 °) -0.01 ° +35.03 ° (+35.00 °) +0.03 °


AMS (Apollo 8) .......................... I (-.3 km) (+.90 km)
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 63

considered to be with respect to the center of


figure of the Moon.
The trends illustrated in figure 2-63 indicate
that the radii relative to the center of mass of the
Moon are systematically less than those relative
to the center of figure by an average of approxi-
mately 2 km. (The angular velocity sensor data
in the 30 ° E to 40 ° E region are somewhat anom-
alous, but a highland area to the south of Mare
Tranquillitatis may have influenced these results.)
The radii relative to the center of mass are also
less than what might be expected, based on the
generally accepted value of about 1738 km for the
mean radius of the visible disk of the Moon.
As pointed out in reference 2-49, these results
may indicate a displacement of the center of mass
of the Moon toward the Earth relative to the
center of figure. If confirmed, this hypothesis
should provide data for geophysical analyses, per-
FI(_UnE 2-62.--Apollo lunar landmark B-1.
haps with implications pertaining to the origin
and history of the Moon. The primary requirement
by Apollo 8 data, the position of the B-1 landmark is to obtain data for radii on the far side of the
(fig. 2-62) was obtained. The B-1 landmark is Moon.
on the lunar front side (table 2-VI). The optical Two types of data were obtained on Apollo 8
sighting and orbit determination serve primarily that should contain information relative to far-
to furnish information from which it is possible side lunar radii; namely, the sextant sightings of
to evaluate the real-time navigational capability landmarks on the far side arid the far-side pho-
of Apollo. tography. Photogrammetric reductions of the far-
side photographs are in progress.
THE FIGURE OF THE MOON Some preliminary results from analyses of the
landmark sightings are available, but the results
W. H. MICHAEL, Ja. given here are from an early stage of the analyses
Some information pertaining to lunar radii in and are subject to later modification. The pre-
the near-side equatorial region of the Moon avail- liminary results on lunar radii from three land-
able prior to the Apollo 8 mission is shown in mark locations, consisting of average values of
figure 2-63, taken from reference 2-49. The data
Legend
in figure 2-63 are plotted without consideration of • Lunar orbiter (angular velocity sensor data)
latitude variations in order to indicate overall _Harmonic analysis of ACIC selenodetic control

trends, but all data are for locations within 4-5 ° 1744 - x Ranger _ impact analysis

of the lunar equator. The solid points on the


1742
figure are taken from an analysis of the angular
:- 1740
velocity sensor data from Lunar Orbiter in con-
junction with orbit determination procedures, and 1738
these radii are with respect to the center of mass C

-" 1736
of the Moon. "'x ".': "°
°.

I I I I I I I ] I I I
The Ranger VIII impact analysis point (ref. _0
17_60 50 40 -30 -20 -I0 0 I0 20 30 40
2-50) is also with respect to the center of mass of Longitude, deg
the Moon. The solid curve represents results of a
harmonic analysis of radii derived from Earth- FIGURE 2-63.--Determinations of lunar radii in the equa-

torial region from Lunar Orbiter and other data.


based photography (ref. 2-51). This curve is thus
64 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPIiY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

TABLE 2-VI I.--Preliminary Results From Analyses mission represents a number of firsts, among which
of Apollo 8 Landmark Sightings are the following:
1. The first photography obtained from lunar
Site orbit which included the return of the original
I,ali_ude Longit u(ie ltadius, km
negatives.
2. The first new lunar photography, for all
n-1 .......... 2.54 ° N 35.(}1 ° E 1737.5 practical purposes, since the Lunar Orbiter pho-
CP-1 ......... -6.28 ° S - 158.07 ¢ W 1742.0
tography of almost 2 years ago.
CP-2 ......... -9.71 o S 163.21 ° E 1737.5
3. The largest scale photography ever obtained
of the lunar far side.
Because surveying and mapping, particularly
results from different orbital passes and somewhat by photogrammetric methods, play an important
different procedures, are shown in table 2-VII. role in the NASA lunar exploration program, it is
These data are with respect to the center of mass only logical to assess the value of the Apollo 8
of the Moon. photography from this standpoint. Such an assess-
The B-1 landmark is on the near side of the ment is of even greater importance in view of the
Moon, and photogrammetric analyses of Lunar limited availability of lunar photography that
Orbiter photographs give a radius of 1735.2 km lends itself to the production of the required
for this point compared with 1737.5 km given in surveys and maps. As a result of these moti-
the table. The 1735.2-km value seems to be con- vations, personnel of the MSC Mapping Sciences
sistent with the results in figure 2-63, indicating a Laboratory undertook an investigation of the
possible bias in the 1737.5-km value in the table. photogrammetric potential of the Apollo 8 pho-
Landmark CP-1, judging from its appearance in tography. This investigation included an evalu-
the Apollo 8 photography, seems to be representa- ation to determine what photography was suitable
tive of the mean surface level in its area. However, for photogrammetric data reduction, stellar cali-
landmark CP-2 is a small crater inside a large brations of the Apollo 8 cameras, sample control
crater, which is in turn inside a still larger crater extension to determine the value of the pho-
of approximately 40 km in diameter; this point tography for establishing lunar control, and the
seems to be well below the mean surface level in production of a topographic map to assess the
its area. value of Apollo 8 photography for mapping. The
Considering the results in table 2-VII inde- results of these investigations, which will subse-
pendently, there is some evidence of larger lunar quently be described in more detail, show that the
radii with respect to the center of mass for the Apollo 8 Hasselblad photography represents a
far-side points. If only the B-1 site is biased, the valuable medium for photogrammetric surveying
evidence is somewhat strengthened. However, and mapping of the lunar surface. Therefore, it is
these data are not considered to be sufficiently concluded that surveying and mapping based on
convincing to confirm (or deny) the hypothesis Apollo mission photography can play an important
concerning a displacement between the center of role in the missions leading not only to the first
mass and the center of figure of the Moon. lunar landing but also to subsequent lunar explo-
ration.

PHOTOGRAMMETRY Photogrammetric Evaluation of Photography


The first step in investigating the photogram-
PHOTOGRAMMETRIC DATA REDUCTION metric potential of Apollo 8 photography was to
prepare a summary of the photography along
PAUL E. NORMAN, MERRITT J. BENDER, AND with pertinent photogrammetric information. The
R. D. ESTEN
evaluation was limited to photography obtained
Introduction with the Hasselblad cameras, used with both
80-ram and 250-ram lenses. Other photography,
The photography obtained from the Apollo 8 such as the 16-ram sequence photography, was
65
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

not considered suitable for photogrammetric data camera was located obliquely to the spacecraft

reductions. window, and there was a pressure difference be-


A description of the Apollo 8 mission, including tween the spacecraft and the outside environment.
Furthermore, two different cameras and a variety
the photographic aspects, is contained in the
Introduction and chapter 4 of this document and of magazines were used for the photography.
will be only briefly summarized here. 5,'lost of the Ideally, the cameras should have been calibrated
with all combinations of lenses and magazines
Hasselblad photography was obtained from a
circular orbit of 60 n. mi. (111 kin) with a 12 ° used during the mission. What was done, in fact,
was to select combinations of cameras, magazines,
inclination with respect to the lunar equator.
and lenses and to use these data for all cases. It
Photography was taken vertically in strips with
the camera bracket mounted, as well as from an was further hoped that the effect of the spacecraft
window and the differential pressure between the
oblique hand-held position. An intervalometer was
available for the strip photography to acquire spacecraft and the lunar surface could be deter-
exposures at 20-second intervals. In all, more mined by stellar photography acquired during the
mission. Such photography was not obtained.
than 600 exposures were acquired using both the
80-mm and the 250-ram lenses. The photography Therefore, the effect, of this condition will have to
be estimated by comparing the plate residuals from
was exposed on 70-ram film, resulting in a format
the camera calibration with those obtained from
size of 55 by 55 ram. Representative scales for
vertical photographs from the l 11-kin altitude data reductions.
The manufacturer furnished some calibration
are 1:1 400 000 for the photography taken with
(lat'L on the camera with the 80-mm lens and an
the 80-mm lens and 1 :440 000 for the photography
taken with the 250-ram lens. The photogrammetric unspecified magazine. Because these data were
incomplete, they were supplemented by stellar
evaluation yielded the following information for
camera calibrations carried out at the Mapping
each photograph:
Sciences Laboratory. The following camera/lens/
1. Frame number
magazine combinations were calibrated:
2. Approximate location
1. Camera 1024 with 80-mm lens and maga-
3. Focal length of lens used
zine C
4. Approximate scale
2. Camera 1024 with 80-ram lens and maga-
5. Forward overlap and side overlap
zine D
6. Sun angle
3. Camera 1024 with 250-ram lens and maga-
7. Relationship to other coverage
zine B
8. Approximate tilt
Detailed information concerning the photo- 4. Camera 1024 with 250-ram lens and maga-
zine D
graphic coverage is included in appendix A. Of
5. Camera 1020 with 80-ram lens and maga-
particular interest are two vertical strips which
run from 150 ° W to 80 ° E. Selected vertical and zine D
6. Camera 1020 with 80-ram lens and maga-
oblique photography of features are also of scien-
zine G
tific interest, such as that of the craters Langrenus
Camera 1024 was used with the intervalometer
and Tsiolkovsky. It should be noted that there
was no time correlation with the orbit, nor were for the acquisition of the vertical strip photog-
raphy. The results of these stellar calibrations
there specific attitude data for the camera.
are considered to be satisfactory, with the stand-
ard error of the plate residuals at the star images
Camera Calibration Data
ranging from 10g to 14#.
Camera calibration data are an integral part of
Analytical Aerial Triangulation
photogrammetric data reductions. The Apollo 8
Because one of the most valuable potential uses
Hasselblad camera had no special facilities for
of the Apollo 8 photography is control extension,
film flattening; the image plane is located in the
considerable effort was expended to investigate
removable magazine and, except for two V-shaped
notches on one edge, has no fiducial marks. The this aspect. There was no direct, tie to orbit data,
66 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

nor was much lunar control available. There were, With this in mind, photographs 2052 to 2055
however, four points on the lunar surface with and 2664 to 2667 were triangulated as a block at
coordinates established by sextant observation CP-1, and photographs 2091 to 2095 and 2702
from Apollo 8 (CP-1, CP-2, and CP-3, and land- to 2705 were triangulated as a block at CP-2.
mark B-l). Since vertical photography was taken In both blocks, the exposure stations were con-
over three of these points, the investigation cen- strained ill latitude and height but allowed to
tered around these control points and an at_mpt adjust in longitude, that is, downtrack. In ad-
to recover the orbital camera positions.
dition to enforcing CP-1 or CP-2, the exposure
The three control points are located on the base as determined by the 20-second intervalom-
lunar far side. The coordinates of these points eter was also enforced. Once the adjusted exposure
are listed in table 2-IV. The photography which stations were obtained, the positions were con-
covers these three control points was obtained
verted to time values; that is, to ground elapsed
from magazine D (revolution 4) and magazine C time (GET). The adjusted camera data for the
(revolution 8); the specific coverage is given in block at CP-2 are found in table 2-IX.
table 2-VIII.
The solutions seem satisfactory, although the
Because no stereoscopic model contained more
results should be treated as preliminary. Although
than one control point, it was decided to analyti- the 15 to 20_ plate residuals might seem high
cally triangulate short strips at CP-1 and CP-2 for conventional aerial triangulation, it must be
and to impose the constraint that adjusted coordi- remembered that corrections were not applied for
nates of the exposure stations lie on the orbit. the differential pressure and the effect of the
spacecraft window. Because the strips are con-
TABLE 2-VIII.--Photographic Coverage of tinuous between CP-1 and CP-2, another check
Control Points
is afforded by computing the average exposure
interval between the two points. The time interval
Control point Magazine D Magazine C
photographs photographs I between magazine D photographs 2055 and 2091,
as determined from the two triangulations, proved
CP-I ..................... 2052 2664 to be 697 seconds. Thus, the exposure interval
2053 2665 is 697/36, or 19.36 seconds. The time interval
2054 2666 between magazine C photographs 2667 and 2702
CP-2 .................... 2702 proved to be 693 seconds, so the exposure interval
2703
is 693/35, or 19.80 seconds. These exposure inter-
2704
2705 vals confirm the feasibility of this approach, and
CP-3 .................... 2161 2771 efforts are currently underway to refine the tri-
2162 2772 angulation.
2773 It is felt that these results show both that
orbital data for the Apollo 8 vertical-strip photo-
By frame numbers.
graphs can be recovered and that the photography

TABLE 2-IX.--Adjusted Camera Data (CP-2)

Frame GET, Latitude, Longitude, Radius, X-tilt, Y-tilt, Heading, Sigma,


hr: rain :sec deg deg km deg deg deg /am

2091 .............. 75:32:17 -- 11.155 - 195.368 1849.05 --0.105 7.225 --94.632 20


2O92 .............. 75:32:37 --11.244 -196.398 1848.92 -- .213 7.394 --94.145 18
2093 .............. 75:32:57 --11.333 - 197.415 1848.74 -.268 7.389 --93.707 21
2095 ............. 75:33:19 -- 11.432 - 198.585 1848.63 - .253 7.736 --93.124 19
2702 ............. 83:26:10 --10.650 - 194.170 1848.8O 7.477 - 14.276 -99.817 17
2_3 ............. 83:26:30 --10.749 - 195.191 1848.86 8.069 -- 12.848 --98.666 16
2704 ............. 83:26:50 -- 10.849 - 196.213 1848.75 8.851 - 11.388 --97.517 18
2705 ............. 83:27:10 --10.957 - 197.241 1848.61 9.775 --9.964 -96.315 21
67
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

H
can be utilized to extend lunar control. This rap=-- dx
C
aspect of the investigation is continuing, and the
and
next step will be to perform continuous triangu-
lations from CP-1 to CP-2. An endeavor is also
being made to acquire spacecraft attitude infor-
mation and to include the information in the
where
reduction.
rap= relative horizontal accuracy
Topographic Mapping H = flight height
Another aspect of the investigation of the sur- dx = accuracy of image measurement
veying and mapping potential of the Apollo 8 mh = relative vertical accuracy
photography was its suitability for the production c = focal length of camera lens
of topographic maps. Two approaches were used. B = space base between exposure
One was a theoretical estimation of the relative
The horizontal accuracy can be estimated by
horizontal and vertical accuracies obtainable, and
using, for dx, the plate residuals from the tri-
the other was the production of a topographic
angulations. Using 20p, one then gets mp_30
map of a small, interesting area of the lunar
meters for the vertical photography taken with
surface.
the 80-ram lens from the circular orbit of 60 n. mi.
A theoretical estimate of relative horizontal and
This value is probably optimistic, however, be-
vertical accuracies can be obtained by the use of
cause the only present method of scaling the
the following equations:

5OOO

\ 1400

Fz(_URE 2-64.--Topographic map produced from Apollo 8 frames 2057-D to 2059-D.


68
ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

stereoscopic models is by the use of the exposure


mission, an attempt has been made to set up
interval and spacecraft velocity. Since both values
three models in the AP/C analytical plotter at
contain uncertainties, the resultant model scale is
the Center of Astrogeology in Flagstaff, Ariz.
approximate. However, it is believed that the
The models selected include three different
horizontal position of points within a stereoscopic modes: the vertical case, the convergent case, and
model (vertical photography taken with the 80- the oblique case. All the photography was taken
mm lens from 60 n. mi.) can be determined to a
with a Hasselblad camera using Kodak 70-ram
standard error of about -4-50 meters. For the
film. Two camera focal lengths, 80 mm and 250
relative heightening accuracy, the value of H/B =
mm, were used. The vertical-case photography
3.5, H/c= 1.4, and dx again is 20_. This gives was selected from magazine D (frames 2081 and
mh= 100 meters. This is an estimate of the accu- 2082), which was taken with the 80-ram lens
racy of relative heights measured over a stereo-
using Estar thin-base type 3400 Panatomic X
scopic model of the vertical 80-mm photography aerial film. The convergent-case photography was
taken from 60 n. mi. The datum in this case is
selected from the C magazine (frames 2703 and
local, because little information is available with
2704), which was also taken with the 80-mm lens
which to level the stereoscopic models. No esti-
using type 3400 film. The oblique photography
mate was made of the attainable accuracy with was selected from the A magazine (frames 2615
the photography taken with the 250-ram lens, and 2616), which was taken with the 250-ram
since no data reduction has been carried out with lens using S0-368 color film.
that photography. The 100-meter accuracy esti- For this evaluation, fourth-generation trans-
mate of the 80-mm vertical photography is not parencies were used. No camera calibration data
good photogrammetrically. However, in this case, were available at the time of this testing, and
it is caused by a combination of the poor base/ there is no established ground control for absolute
height ratio (B/H) of 0.3 and the 20_ plate
orientation. One model of the vertical-case pho-
residuals.
tography and one model of the convergent case
The topographic map (fig. 2-64) was produced
were set up on the AP/C plotter. Contour maps
from photographs 2057 to 2059 of magazine D, of these two models have been compiled at a
taken with the 80-mm lens. The contour interval
scale of 1:200 000. The model of vertical pho-
is 200 meters. The contours are purely relative.
tography has a contour interval of 200 meters,
However, they do show that the possible "lava
and the model of convergent photography has a
tubes" run up and over crater walls and ridges.
contour interval of 250 meters. Also, a relatively
This, in itself, is interesting and points out the
large-scale contour map was made of a special
value of topographic maps that can be produced
crater in the model of the vertical photography
with the Apollo 8 photography.
at a scale of 1:50 000 and a contour interval of
100 meters.
PHOTOGRAMMETRY OF APOLLO 8 Twelve profiles in these two models have also
PHOTOGRAPHY
been measured for comparison with similar profiles
obtained with an isodensitometer, for study of
SItERMAN S. C. WU
surface roughness, and for determination of the

Introduction accuracy of the photogrammetric method by re-


peated measurements.
Apollo 8 mission photography is the first return- The attempt to set up the oblique model was
film photography of the lunar surface in the U.S. unsuccessful because the relative orientation com-
space program. The photography from this first
putation would not converge in the AP/C com-
manned lunar orbiting mission has good resolution
puter. This phenomenon has several possible
and does not have the distortions that the previous causes. First, the actual lens focal length is pos-
GRE-film photographs of unmanned Lunar sibly different from the designed 250-mm lens.
Orbiter photography had. For a preliminary scien- Second, the lens may cause large distortions.
tific evaluation regarding the photogrammetric Third, the photographs were taken when the
applications of photographs from the Apollo 8 Apollo 8 spacecraft was not in lunar orbit. This
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPIIIC ANALYSIS 60

situation resulted in highly tilted photographs, a


small model base, and a large difference in altitude
between the two photographs of the model. How-
ever, this model could probably be set up on the
AP/C plotter if the correct lens focal length and
lens distortion values were available.
Most of the photography of the C and D maga-
zines can be used in stereoscopic pairs for es-
tablishing photogrammetric models. However, to
obtain accurate results, the complete camera cali-
bration data are required. Ground control for the
back side of the Moon may be established by the
method of aerial triangulation using the vertical
stereoscopic strip of magazine D and some parts
of the convergent strip of magazine C.

Preliminary Photogrammetrie Evaluation


Since the orbital flight height of the Apollo 8
spacecraft was about 110 kin, the scale of the
photography is about: 1 : 1 375 000 for the 80-mm
lens and 1:441 000 for the 250-mm lens. If the
camera has a resolution of 50 lines/mm at the
center of the photographs, then approximately 30
meters in ground resolution can be obtained with
the 80-mm lens and approximately 10 meters with
the 250-mm lens. Because the least reading in the
AP/C plotter is 1_, repeated observations in the
plotter of a specific image point in the model
have produced the unbelievable result of a 6_ or
7_ standard error for both horizontal position
pointings and elevation readings, which is equiva-
lent. to about. 8 meters on the ground. This result.
was obtained on the type 3400 film by an experi-
enced AP/C plotter operator. Since the oblique
model using color photography taken with the
250-mm lens did not set up on the AP/C plotter,
the following discussion refers only to the models
of vertical and convergent photography taken
with the 80-ram lens, which set up easily. I]/P

I_C

Model of Vertical Photography (Magazine D)


FIGURE 2-65.--Apollo 8 photographs used in model of
Vertical photographs 2081-D and 2082-D (fig. vertical photography. (a) Apollo 8 frame 2081-D,
2-65) were selected for the first model. This model (b) Apollo 8 frame 2082-D.
was selected so that, profiles could be measured
and a comparison made of the photogrammetric 175 ° W. The ground coverage is about 2650 km°'.
and photoclinometric methods. The photography The Sun angles were 34 ° and 35 ° , respectively, at
from the D magazine taken with the 80-mm lens the time the photographs were taken. The contour
is black and white. The exposure time is 1/250
map of the entire model is shown in figure 2-66.
second with an f-stop of 5.6. The model coverage The model was scaled by measuring the distance
is on the back side of the Moon located at. 10 ° S,
70 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL ()BSERVATIONS

TL v3
o
000

IPGI

IPG:

IPG3
I PG3

[HP
IHI
IHC IHC

IDC

-ii.
i ! _'-_< :_
174.2° IVP/IVC 11.1 °
175.4°
0 5 10 15 • 20 kilometers
0 5 10 miles Explanation
Contour interval: 200 meters (--') Crater rim 0 Leveling point
- Supplementary contour r_ Scaling point

FI_uRr: 2-66. -Contour map of the entire model of vertical photography


INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 71

/ flO, 000
/I /./- \

I / //
9500 _
/ // .t -..

\.
\
•1_ i II 19000"i \_ \\

\
1

!\ ',
)
Y /
f /
/ i
1
i I

\_/' ) \ "-.. /
l
.I
/
\ _ 95o01 .J
',__.--" \
\

"-- 9500

\,

Explanation

0 1 2 3 4 5 kilometers
tj
Crater rim
0 1 2 3 .4 miles

Contour interval: 100 meters


Topographic map
February 1969

Pl<iUlli,: 2-67. Contour rail I) of a special feature in the model of verti( al photography

appeared to be at the same elevation. An arbitrary


between similar images identified on I, unar Orbiter
elevation of 10 000 meters was assigned to these
II medium-resolution frame 33. Leveling of this
three points. The model scale is l : 1 407 789. This
model was performed by arbitrarily selecting three
settle was magnifie(t 7.0389 times to ot)tain itn
points (marked with (lots on the map) which
72
ANALYSIS I)F APOLLO 8 PItOTOGRAPIIY AND VISUAl. ()BSEI{VATIONS

original nmp scale of 1:200 000. l)arameters from


Profiles I Ill' anti I-HC of figures 2-68(a) and
the output of the AP/C COml)uIer for the relative 2 68(b), respectively, were measured from the
orientation and the ahsolut(, (,rienttttion tran._-
nlo(lel of vertic,'tl photography at the same lo-
formation are listed in table 2 X.
cation, as indicated in figure 2 65(b), but profile
Figure 2 67 is a contour map of "t small (:rater
I-tIP was plotted (lirectly from the AP/C plotter,
compiled "tt a scale of 1:50 000 (the square area
and profile I-}tC was measured point, by point
marked off in fig. 2-66) "rod shows the smallest
an(l then conq)ute(l by the IBM 360 computer
contour interval that can })e compile(l. The scale
anti p]otte(I on the XYZ plotter. This process
on the full-sized map is a 28.1556 magnification of
provi(les th(, geologist with information for per-
the model scale. The AP/C operator helieves that
forming ,_statisticalanalysis of surface roughness.
a 50-meter contour interv:d could be obtained
Profiles |-VP and I-VC of figures 2-69(a) and
by using an extremely slow plotting speed and 2-69(b), respecliveIy, were measure(l in the same
careful -tttention.
purpose as l-H1 ) aml I-HC, except that they

o "ll,000
o_E 9,000 i_ _
rz,, I I J
I I
0 5 tO 20 30
40 5O
(a) Ground distance, kilometers

Photogrammetry
-- -- -- I sodensitometer
__ iI,
000
>.e.,
_E %000 r I
I 1
0 5 l0 20 30 40 50
tO) Ground distance, kilometers

F/,u}{_: 2-68.--Profiles in east-west (lireetion in the model of vertical I)hotog,. q)t y. (a) 1)rofile I-lIP, (b) proiile I-tIC.

c"
o _ II,O00[Z _ . _
'_ c_ 9,o0oF---"--
> -_ _ .. . _ - -
_-ll I I 5I I l I t J 1 I •
-_ E 7,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
(at Ground distance, kilometers

_ ll,
O00c
_ 9,ooop---'--. _- _ _ _
,_, E 7,000_ IIII 1 I I I I l t I
0 5 I0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
(b) Ground distance, ki[olnelers

FIGURE 2-6t).--t'rofiles in north-south (lircclion in model of vertical l)hologr.q)hy. (a) Profile I-VP, (b) profile I-VC.

lO.Or
-....,.

// I-D i
o a;
- I-D2
L_
I-D 3
84_
81oF i J ; ; -T_L i L
0 J )
iJ3 14 15
Ground distance, kilomelers

FIt;LInE 2-70.--l'rofiles of a crater in the mode] or vertical photography.


73
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

as shown in figure 2 71, were selected for the


were measured in a south-north direction as indi-
second model. This pttrticular model was selected
cated in figure 2-65(b).
for evaluating the Apollo 8 convergent photog-
Profiles I-D 1, I-D 2, and I-D 3, as shown in
raphy for photogrammetrie processing. These are
figure 2-70, were measured point by point and
also black-and-white photogral)hs taken with tile
computed by the IBM 360 computer, then plotted
80-rain lens. This model covers the entire crater
oil the XYZ plotter. These three profiles are
302 at 11 ° S, 162 ° W. The scale of this model
exactly at the salne location and were measured
w'ts also obtained from nieasurenmnts made on
three times. These measurements, therefore, pro-
Lunar Orbiter II medium-resolution frame 33.
vide not only information for crater slope studies
The Sun angles were 41 ° and 42 °, respeetively.
but also show the error of plotting in the model.
A contour nmp of this niodel, as shown in figure

Model of Convergent Photography ( i_lagazine C) 2-72, was coInpiled using the same procedure for

leveling as in the first model. The. original niap


Photographs 2703 and 2704 from m,tgazine C,

"FABLE 2 X.--Parameters of Orientations of the Model of Vertical Photography

llelatiw, orientation Absolute orientation

Parameters
I_'ralz_e Frame Frame Frame
2082 2081 2082 2081

80.000 80.000 80.000


80,000
Focal length, mm ...............................
.000 25.725 - 10.277 15.567
Bx, mm .........................................
.000 .348 - 3.197 --2.876
Br, mm .........................................
77.416 79.273 80.030
80.000
Bz, mm .........................................
.0000 1.6750 .0181 1.6448
K, deg ...........................................
.0000 -.1714 2.3071 1.9232
% deg ...........................................
.0000 2.8327 - 7.3675 -4.6008
_, deg ...........................................

EI-VF

FmVRE 2-71.--Apollo 8 photographs used in model of convergent photography. (a) Apollo 8 frame 2703, (b) Apollo 8
frame 2704.
74 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

160.3 ° Topographic map


-8.8 ° February 1969
Scale 1:200,000
/
5 i0 15 20 kilometers
0 5 10 miles
-rr-vp_
Contour interval: 250 meters
/
/

/
/
/

G
oVl

Explanation

Crater rim

Scarp
N o

I Leveling point
[]
Scaling point

\
rl'-Vp -

FIGURE 2-72.--Contour map of the model of convergent photography.


75
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

TABLE 2-XI.--Parameters of Orientations of the Model of Convergent Photography

Relative orientation AI)sohtte oricnt:dion

|)arq, nlet ors


FFOJI](_ Frltnle FrttlllO Fl'_.t nit

2703 2704 2703


2704

80.000 80.000 80.000


Focal length, mm ................................ 80.000
18.079 3.831 21.978
.000
Bx, mm ........................................
.569 -- 5.506 -6.051
. O00
Ur, mm ........................................
79.793 79.719 78.608
80.000
Bz, mm ........................................
1.8933 - .4543 1.4538
•0000
_, deg ..........................................
5.7600 9.9119 9.7613
6.0000
_, deg ..........................................
13.5742 12.7690 16.2156
10. 0000
4), deg ..........................................

scale is 1:200 000, and the contour interval is roughness studies or to test the repeatability of
this model.
250 meters, larger than the first model. This may
show the difference between vertical and conver-
Comparison Between Photogrammetric and
gent photography. The scale of the full-sized map Photoclinometric Profiles
is a 8.4480 magnification of the 1 : l 689 600 model
scale. Profiles I-PG 1, I-PG 2, and I-PG 3, as shown
Parameters from the output of the AP/C com- in figure 2-74, were measured point, by point from
the model of vertical photography for comparison
puter after relative orientation and the absolute
orientation transformation of this model are listed with profiles IDT-1, IDT-8, and IDT-15 meas-
ured with the microdensitometer. Since the profiles
in table 2-XI.
Profiles II-HP and II-VP of figure 2-73 were obtained from the microdensitometer measure-
ments are not entirely covered in the stereoscopic
plotted directly from the AP/C plotter in the
east-west and south-north directions, respectively, model, a short distance on each profile could not
be measured on the AP/C plotter, but the scales
as indicated in figure 2-71(b). No attempt was
made to measure profiles analytically for surface of both methods were checked very closely. Be-

Elevation,
meters

13,000

11,000 _
F
I
9,000 _1 I I I I I I
I I 5O
20 30 40
0 5 10
Ground distance, kilometers
(a)

Elevation,
meters

14,000

12,000
10,000
I
8,000 I I I I I [ ] I I I
0 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
(b) Ground distance, kilomelers

FOJUaE 2-73.--Profiles in east-west and south-north directions in model of convergent photography. (a) Profile II-HP,
(b) Profle II-VP.
76 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

2OOO
Photogrammelry
1800 .... I sodensitometer

1600

,,_1400 L
o_
1200 - /
E

_" 10O0

800 _ _1t \N

600

4OO

200

I I I I I J I i : L I I I I 1 I I r J L i l I II[Ij
0
5 10 15 20 25 30
(al
Ground distance, kilometers

1800

1600

1400

1200 _. 2

lOOO _. / f --_
'- _ "" _ Photogrammetry
c
._o 800 ...: _ -- -- -- I sodensitometer

_o
L_J 600
4OO

200

1 J J j l I I l i l i I
i I I
i I J I J _'k, l ! I l I I i I
0
5 t0 15 20 25 30
(D)
Ground distance, kilometers

1600 - 1

1400

1200
Photocjrammetry

1000
"_ -- ---- Isodensitometer
._ 800

_ 6oo
uu
4OO

200

IJ l I J I I i J I I I I I i I I I I t l I I I_["" I I ; J
0
5 10 15 20 25 30
(c)
Ground distance, kilomelers

Photogrammetry
------Isodensitometer

E- 2000,__

_> _, 10O0_ ....


__oE
I I J l I I 1
I I I L_ I I 1 I L I
0 5
10 15 20 25 30
Id) Ground distance, kilometers
77
INITIAL PHOTOGRAP]IIC ANALYSIS

Photogrammelry
------ Isodensilometer

5 10 15 20 25
Ground distance, kilometers
(e)

Phologrammetry
-- -- -- I sodensilometer

_ 2000

_ tooo t

_-' I I _]_ _ I [ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I _-'_'-" [ I I I


0 5 I0 15 20 25 30
(fl Ground distance, kilometers

FmUHE 2-74.--Comt)arison 1)etween photogrammetric and l)hotoclinometrie methods. (a) l)rofile I-PG 1, (b) Profile

I-PG 2, (c) Protilc I P(; 3, (d) Profile I-PG ] with reduced vertical s(,ale, (e) l'rofile I-PG 2 with reduced vertical

scale, (f) Profile I PG 3 with reduced vertic'd scale.

cause of the lack of ground-control points, leveling This may mean that the CFL of the 250-ram lens
procedures are arbitrary in both methods; there- may (lifter very greatly from its designed value.
The location of the principal point of the 250-mm
fore, slope comparison between each pair of profiles
can only be made by rotating one to make the lens may be farther away from the center of the
best fit with the other. Photogrammetric profile photograph than for the 80-ram lens. Lens dis-
tortions of the 250-ram lens may be nmch more
I-PG 3 comparcs well with IDT-15. Profiles
I-PG 2 and IDT-8 are still somewhat similar. significant than the lens distortions of the 80-ram
The most difference occurs between profiles I-PG 1 lens. These answers can only be obtained from a
careful camera calibration using the standard
and IDT-1, especially at the east side (left).
photogrammetric calibration.
Discussion Two saw teeth appear at the lower edge of each
photograph from the Apollo 8 mission. These
Camera Calibration two saw teeth may be used as references for the

The sums of the squares of the residuals for the location of the photograph principal point and
relative orientation of the two models from maga- also for film shrinkage correction in both the X

zines D and C, taken with the SO-ram lens, are and the Y directions.
Og2 and 21g 2, respectively, as determined by the
Establishment of Control Points
AP/C eomiSuter. In both cases, parallax measure-
Because most overlapping pairs of photographs
ments were made on 12 evenly distributed points
over each model. However, for the oblique model of m,tgazine D and part of magazine C have good
exposures for mapping purposes or for geological
of magazine A taken with the 250-ram lens, eon-
vergenees for the relative orientation could not. interpretation, a system of control points by
be obtained, even though parallax measurements photogrammetric methods can be established.
were made only on six points. Camera calibration This system of control points, which would be
of great value in future mapping for geological
data for only the 80-ram lens were received after
all the measurements were made. The calibrated purposes, (,an be accomplished by strip aerial
triangulation using pure analytical methods or by
focal length (CFL) is 79.95 mm, which is close
instrumental triangulation, especially with the
to 80 mm. No indication is shown in the cali-
bration data for the location of the principal point.. AP/C plotter.
7_ ANALYSIS ()F AI'()LLO 8 PIt()TOGRAPHY AND VISUAL I)BSEI_,VATIONS

.4bsohae Orientation of a _lodel of J_ertical 2_2


Photography JVith the Tracking l)ala 230312301

(Speed and Tinu, Interval) 230411i 300


2305
:::,': 22 9
If an -tssumption inay be nmtte that flight alti- 2306; iii:: i 2298
rp iI ,, , i i
tudes between each t)air of a(ljacent camera sta- 23071 : I I :II i : 2297

tions in the orbit are "q)l)roximately the same, 2308:1: :: i:', : : : 2296
_,, , lq ,b, , t ,
then a model in the AP/(' t)lotler can be leveled 2309:',:: ;::_,: ', : : : 2295

by iterations of absolute orienlalion until the :::ll ::ll; : ; : : I 2294 2293 2292 2291 b

s,mm bz is arrived at from both photographs and


the x tilts W1 and W2 appr()ach zero. I)uring the
iterations, sc,ding can be eshblished sinmltane-
ously by comparing the b-_se in t he model and the
FmURE 2-75. Piggyback IMC experiment in maria with
base in space, which can t)e (_()mpute(t from tile
low Sun angle.
spee(l and time inlerval or from tl and B/H.

TABLE 2-XII.--Approximate Time Intervals


SIMULATION OF LUNAR MODULE
of Photographs
PHOTOGRAPHY AND LUNAR
[Based on measurements of the photographs]
MODULE LANDING CONDITIONS
][?l'Itll i(# Time iniervals,
D. 1). LLOYD
sec

EXPERIMENT ()PI<RATION

On revolution 3, a set of 39 photographs (frames


2291 ............................. 20
2292 ............................. 20
2271 to 2309) were taken out the right-han(t
2293 ........................... 20
rendezvous window using a bracket-mounte(t 2294 ............................... 10
Hasselblad camera and tile 250-ram lens. (These 2295 .............................. 10
were the only 250-ram lens black-and-white photo- 2296 ............................... 10
2297 .............................. 10
graphs taken with a bracket-mounted camera.)
2298 ............................... 10
The lunar module pilot (LMP) activated many of
2299 '_ ............................. i, 27
these photographs in(lividually (fig. 2-75 and 2300 .............................. 16
table 2-XII). 2301 ............................... 10
The f-stop was left unehange(l at the nmximum 2302 ............................ 10

23(13 .............................. 10
aperture off/5.6. The initial 29 photographs (2271
221(/4 ............................. 10
to 2299) were taken -it a shutter speed of 1/250
2305 ............................. 25
second. The final 10 photographs (2300 to 2309) 2306 .............................. 2O
were taken at a shutter speed of 1/60 second. 2307 ............................. 20
The film used was black-and-white Panatonfic X, 221(18 ............................... 2(1
2210!1 .............................
SO-3400, magazine E. (These 10 photographs
were the only SO-3400 fihn phoh)graphs taken at
" Sinalles! ._cale faclor.
1/60 second. All others were taken "it 1/250
second.) t, Addilional time required 1o change shutler exposure
(I/250 lo 1/60 sec .
This sequence of photographs w,L,_ taken at the
same time that '1 landmark !raining sequence
(maneuver and operation) was performed. Tile peak or crater edge which is part of a crater pair.
commander (CDR) was viewing tile lunar surface He viewed the lunar feature through the crew
north of landing site 1 through the left-hired optical :alinement sight (COAS), which is rigidly
rendezvous window. He viewed an area near mounted to tile spacecraft with its optical axis
Maskelyne F, and, in p,lrticular, u lunar feature aline(l along the X-axis. To enable the CDR to
at approximately 5° N, 34 ° E, vonsisting of a view the lunar feature through the COAS, the
79
INITIAL PHOTOGRAt'IIIC ANALYSIS

observ-ttions in (,onstanl albedo simulators. A


spacecraft was oriented with the optical axis of
secon(l cause of definiti<m wouht t>e shadow lining
the COAS pointed roughly at the lunar feature.
During the training sequence, the spacecraft of feat ures.
traveled a considerable distance, creating a change l)uring a separate l)ilchut) se(tuence on rew)-
in viewing direction of greater than 45 °. Reorien- lution 8, a series of photographs (2818 to 2821,
t ation of the COAS required a rotation (roll) of nmgazinc C) was taken under similar conditions,
but with the 80-nun lens. The four photographs
the spacecraft. The CDR achieved this reorien-
inclu(le an area close to zero phase .m(l at Sun
ration and roll by firing the spacecraft attitude
elevation .ingles simil-_r to conditions that will
control system, using the feedback loop of moni-
occur at LM descent. (The portion of the photo-
toring the lunar feature visually and ,tdjusfing
the spaceer'fft orient,ltion roll to suit his viewing graphs near zero ph'tse is in Mare Tr,mquillitatis.)
Because the lens used was the 80-ram rttther
convenience.
th-tn the 250-mm lens used on the earlier set, the
If, at the time each photograph was taken, the
extent of the hmar surface covered per degree of
spacecr,fft were rolling at exactly the rate re-
lens fiehl of view was larger and the resolution
quired to compensate for spacecraft travel relative
to a viewed hmar feature, then the lunar feature and detail correspondingly less.
would stay at a fixed position in the COAS and ItARDWARE AND IMAGE MOTION
the picture taken by the camera would have zero COM PENSATION CONSIDERATIONS
image-motion smear. If, for example, the roll rate
llardware Limitations of Light-Collecting
were 60 percent of the rate required to keep the
same viewing of the lunar feature, then the smear Capability
would be reduced by 60 percent, leaving 0.4 un- Bee,rose of limit,ttions on weight and volume,
compensated. (If a roll rate of 120 percent were there is :_ restriction on lens diameter and, thus,
achieved, then 0.2 of the smear would be on lens light-collecting (,_pability. The 250-mm
uncompensated.) lens carried on Apollo 8 h._(l an aperture of f/5.6.
If some of the 10 photographs taken at 1/60 The largest standard Zeiss lens avaihble com-
second showed that a degree of compensation h,td mercially (500 ram) has a lens diameter corre-
been achieved, the possibility of high-resolution sponding to f/8. To achieve f/5.6 with a 500-mm
photography would be demonstrated. lens of reasonable optical quality wouhl require
Frames 2271, 2272, ,rod 2273, taken at 1/250 :t lens weighing approximately 10 pounds (the
second, were of separate interest. These photo- weight of the Lunar Orbiter lens). An aperture
graphs show maria near landing site 1 at Sun of f/5.6 is, therefore, a reasonable limit for long-
elevation angles similar to conditions th'g may focaMength, high-resolut ion lenses for early Apollo
occur at LM descent. missions. Because light-power collection per unit
Photographs 2339 to 2343 of nmgazine E are area of film is proportional to the square of the
of related interest. In particular, photogr'Lph 2341 f-stop, there is a limit on lens light-power col-
shows an area of Mare Fecunditatis taken with a lecting c:tpability per unit area of film. This limi-
Sun elevation angle of approximately 17 ° and :L tation generates a nee(t for long exposure time in
look angle of approximately 26 ° • The camera order to collect sufficient light energy per unit
was oriented so that zero phase occurred near the area of fihn crystals, which, in turn, generates a
center of the photograph. The 80-ram lens was need for image motion compensation (IMC) for
hand held with a shutter speed at 1/250 second photography of regions of the Moon that are
and an f-stop of 5.6. within 20 ° of the terminator.
These photographs show lighting conditions Derivation of I MC: Requirements
similar to that which could be experienced during
On regions of the Moon where the Sun is below
LM descent under one set of critical conditions.
20 ° elevation, there is a shortage of light for all
Albedo variations show up quite clearly near zero
high-resolution fihns at f/5.6 unless the shutter
phase, and these variations explain nmch of the
is heht open for approximately 1,/125 second.
detail .rod definition observed by the astronauts
While the shutter is open for 1./125 second, the
in viewing the hmar surface compared to their
8O ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL {)BSERVATIONS

spacecraft moves about 13 meters, producing a compensation to be less accurate than the 10
smear of approximately 13 meters if uncompen- percent required. One of these could arise from
sated. Without this smear (that is, with compen- uncertainties in the capability of the spacecraft to
sation) a resolution of approxinmtely 2.7 meters respond to the specified commands. (The control
with a 500-ram lens, or approxinmtely 5.4 meters of the attitude engine thrust levels as it acts
with a 250-ram lens, could be obtained.
against the inertia of the spacecraft.) Fortunately,
A 100-ram lens would provide a basic resolution the uncertainty here is much less than 10 percent.
of approximately 13.2 meters. A combination of (It is, in fact, less than 1 percent.) The second
13-meter smear (corresponding to 1/125 second) factor is in the uncertainties introduced by inaccu-
with 13.2-meter resolution provides significant rate geometric instructions to the spacecraft atti-
image degradation of resolution and is near the tude control system.
upper limit of acceptable smear. (A smear equal The LM photography simulation/IMC experi-
to 40 percent of the basic resolution is more ment, performed as a piggyback operation added
acceptable as a goal.) For 100- or 80-ram lenses, to the training sequence performed on revolution
a shutter speed of 1/250 second or less should 3 of Apollo 8, was intended to provide an initial
be used for all exposures until the combination of evahmtion of any problems involved in achieving
1/250 second and maximum 'tperture requires the desired spacecraft roll rate.
nmre light. (A shutter speed of 1//250 second was
selected for all regular photography during the
Apollo 8 mission.) TECHNIQUES FOR PROVIDING THE
When the 250-ram lens is used uncompensated REQUIRED GEOMETRIC INSTRUCTIONS
for IMC, a shutter speed of 1/'250 second produces
an undesirable smear of 6.6 meters imposed upon There are several possible techniques for pro-
the basic resolution of 5.4 meters for vertical viding the required geometric instructions to the
photography; however, for nonvertical photo- spacecraft, control system. The preferred method
graphs at a range of 200 kin, the basic resolution would be to obtain the instructions directly from
is approximately 10.8 meters, and the smear of a prestorcd computer software program. The
6.6 meters can be considered acceptable for most necessary computer program is, however, not yet
lighting conditions. (However, 1,/250 second pro- available.
vides insufficient light when the angle of Sun ele- Two alternative methods involve astronaut par-
vation is less than 20°.) ticipation. In the first method, the astronaut
Image motion compensation to reduce the 13 substitutes for the desired computer software pro-
meters (produced with 1/125-second exposure) gram. He inputs to the control geometric instruc-
to 1.3 meters, 10-percent residual, is within the tions based on printed instructions provided him
state of the art of IMC cameras. Better than 1- preflight, hi the second method, the astronaut
percent residual was achieved with the Lunar watches the point of photographic interest with
Orbiters. Image motion compensation based on his eyes and fires the reaction control system to
spacecraft velocity and relative "altitude derived minimize relative rate. This sighting can be
from tracking data can do better than the re- through a reflex camera or through a separate
quired 10 percent residual, if the camera has a optical sighting instrument which looks down the
mechanism for moving the film to achieve compen- same axis as the camera; for example, the COAS
sation. Such a camera is desirable. Without com- can be used to aim a rendezvous-window-mounted
pensation in the camera, the camera must be camera.
bracket mounted to the spacecraft and the space- The LM photography simulation/IMC experi-
craft must be rolled to provide IMC. (This tech- ment performed on lunar revolution 3 of Apollo 8
nique has limitations when an attempt is made to used a downgraded modification of the second
achieve a strip of photography.) The spacecraft method. The method was downgraded in that the
is oriented toward the target of interest (luring nmneuver was not performed for the specific pur-
the roll.
pose of obtaining photographs and, naturally, it
Two factors might generate uncertainties in could not be optimized for the photographic
spacecraft roll, which, in turn, might cause the purpose. The photographic experiment rode piggy-
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS 81

Results
back on a maneuver performed to optimize the
viewing convenience of the astronaut. The sig- Tile piggyback IMC technique produced partial
nificant part of the IMC experiment (that carried compensation :rod improved the resolution ob-
out with the shutter speed of 1/60 second) was, tained in photograph 2304.
in fact, not started until the spacecraft was The data obtained from this experiment confirm
vertically over the target (table 2-XII). One effect that any reasonable operation of -r technique for
of this delay w'_s to cause glare oil the film. A providing IMC will enable high-resolution pho-
second effect was to cause low exposure, since the tography to be obtained of the landed LM, the
phase angle was never below 86 °. A third effect shape of its shadow, and the surrounding lunar
is that the phase of correction of the roll may surface.
have been partially or fully missed.
SUMMARY
MEASUREMENT OF RESIDUAL SMEAR
The Apollo 8 mission provided much new infor-
mation which both supplements and complements
Method
the Lunar Orbiter material. In particular, the
Certain of the photographs taken to evaluate high-illumination photography is of great value.
the piggyback IMC technique were measured by The following are some of the valuable aspects
the Cornell Aeronautical Laboratory to determine of the high-illumination photography:
the estimates of residual smear. The apparatus 1. Inner walls of craters are seen better than
has a 1# slit providing a measurement accuracy before. (In the majority of Lunar Orbiter photo-
of 1000 lines/mm. A model 1140 Mann miero- graphs, these walls are either overexposed or are
densitometer was used to measure the change in in shadow.) Patterns resulting from downslope
transmittance of the film between shadows and movement are obvious. Lunar rock layers show
the adjacent illuminated surface. up clearly.
In this technique, the shadow edge is scanned 2. For the first time, it is possible to correlate
in the direction of spacecraft travel, and the rate brightness (reflectivity) and topography at com-
of change of transmittance with distance is used paratively high resolution.
as a measure of modulation transfer factor (MTF) 3. Before the Apollo 8 mission, it was thought
and, thus, resolution. The change of intensity is that photogrammetric analysis of lunar photo-
adjusted for the effect of Sun penumbra lighting. graphs would be restricted to photography ob-
tained at Sun evaluations lower than 45 ° . It has
Measurement Data Obtained now been demonstrated that photogrammetric
analysis can be made of photographs obtained
The previously mentioned method of estimating
even at the zero-phase point.
residual smear, using fourth-generation positiw_
4. For the first time, ejecta (ray) patterns from
transparencies, obtained the following measure-
ment data. small, bright craters are visible in detail. Ballistics
The resolution of the preexposure bar chart was of ejection may be determined for otherwise ap-
parently similar craters which show distinctly
46 lines/mm. This chart., recorded preflight on the
(tiffercnt ray systems. Many more of these craters
film by an 80-ram lens, was for comparison pur-
were visible than had been anticipated.
poses to show basic unsmeared resolution.
Five measurements were taken on frame 2304 5. For the first time, surface brightness at. zero-

(26, 20, 19, 30, and 34 lines/ram). The average phase angle has been measured.
In addition, the following results were obtained
resolution was 26 lines/ram.
from the photographs:
Uncompensated photography would have pro-
duced a film smear of 15 lines/mm at a vertical 1. The photography has improved our knowl-
edge of the topographic character of far-side
range of 102 km computed as follows:
features.
(250 mm_ = 66 2. Several l,argets of opportunity yielded sig-
_0 X 1.6 km km / mu or 15 lines/mm
nificant geologic information.
The value would be less at greater ranges. 3. Stereoscopic coverage, permitting photo-
82
ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

granunetry and excellent visual presentation, is


At the orbital height of Apollo 8, photographs
clearly of great value and a unique contribution taken with the 80-mm lens are most useful for
of the mission. The photogrammetry is by far geologic purposes from approximately 0 ° to 5°
the best ever obtained of the Moon.
from the groundtrack and have some value out
4. Photogrammetry and photoclinometry can to approximately l0 °. Photographs taken with
be compared in detail, and the prospect of evalu-
the 250-ram lens are most useful out to approxi-
ating the two against each other appears promising.
mately l0 ° and have some value out to approxi-
5. Whole-disk pllotography will be of value to mately 14 °. Photographs with the 250-mm lens
extend selenodetic control over large areas of the
are also useful when taken vertically if image
east limb and back side of the Moon. Control
motion is compensated for. Resolution with the
based on supposed positions and pointing angles 250-ram lens is about three times better than that
of the Lunar Orbiters has been shown to be very
with the 80-ram lens, but the field of view is only
difficult to establish.
a ninth as great.

REFEREN CES

2-1. _VHITAKER, E. A.: Evaluation of the Russian Pho-


O. A.: The Potassium-Argon Age of a Glass
tographs of the Moon's Far Side. Univ. of
Sample From the NSrdlinger Ries. Z. Natur-
Arizona, Commun. Lunar and Planetary Lab.,
forschung, vol. 16a, no. 11, Nov. 1961, p. 1240.
vol. 1, no. 13, May 18, 1962, pp. 67-71.
2-11. YOl_G, GEORGE A.: The Physics of the Base Surge.
2-2. WmTAKER, E. A.: Evaluation of the Soviet Photo-
U.S. Naval Ordnance Lab., White Oak, Md.,
graphs of the Moon's Far Side. The Moon, NOL-TR 64-103, 1965.
Meteorites, and Comets. Vol. IV of The Solar
2-12. O'KEE_'E, JOHN A.: The Orig_ of Tektites. Space
System, B. M. Middlehurst and G. P. Kuiper, Sci. Rev., vol. 6, no. 2, 1966, pp. 174-221.
eds., Univ. Chicago Press, 1963, pp. 123-128. 2-13. DUKE, M. B.: Petrology of the Basaltic Achondrite
2-3. Commission 16 for the Physic.d Study of Planets Meteorites. Ph.D. thesis, Calif. Institute of Tech-
and Satellites: Resolution No. 1. Trans. Astron. nology, 1963.
Union, vol. llb, D. H. Sadler, ed., Academic 2-14. Moons, It. J.: Density of Small Craters on the
Press, 1962, pp. 234-235.
Lunar Surface. Astrogeologic Studies. Part D:
2-4. LIPSKIY, Y. N.: Investigation of the Far Side of the
Studies for Space Flight Program. Geol. Survey,
Moon with the Aid of Rockets. The Moon, May 1964, pp. 34-51. (Also available as NASA
Meteorites, and Comets. Vol. IV of The Solar CR-58623.)
System, B. M. Middlehurst and G. P. Kuiper, 2-15. KvlPEn, GERARD P.: Volcanic Sublimates on Earth
eds., Univ. Chicago Press, 1963, pp. 90-122. and Moon. Univ. of Arizona Commun. Lunar
2-5. TRASK, NEWELL J.; AND ROWAN, LAWRENCE C.:
and Planetary Lab., vol. 3, no. 49, July 1965,
Lunar Orbiter Photographs: Some Fundamental
pp. 36-60.
Observations. Science, vol. 158, no. 3808, Dec. 22,
2-16. SHOPMAKER, E. M.; BATSON, R. M.; HOLT, H. E.;
1967, pp. 1529-1535.
ET AL.: Colorimetric Observations of Lunar Sur-
2-6. OnERnECK, VERNE R.; AND QUAIDE, WILLIAM L.:
face. Surveyor III Mission Report, pt. II, sec.
Genetic Implications of Lunar Regolith Thickness
III, JPL TR 32-1177, June 1967, pp. 51-54.
Variations. Icarus, vol. 9, no. 3, Nov. 1968, pp.
(Also available as NASA CR-88952.)
446-465.
2-17. WRmHT, W. H.: The Moon as Photographed by
2-7. OETKING, PHILLIP: Photometric Studies of Diffusely Light of Different Colours. Pub. Astron. Soe.
Reflecting Surfaces With Applications to the
Pacific, vol. 41, no. 241, 1929, pp. 125-132.
Brightness of the Moon. J. Geophys. Res., vol. 7l,
2-18, tlAnms, DANIEL L.: Photometry and Colorimetry
no. 10, May 15, 1966, pp. 2505-2513. of Planets and Satellites. Planets and Satellites.
2-8. L._asoN, H. K.; AND _ATEER, G. G.: Cross-
Vo]. III of The Solar System, G. P. Kuiper and
Hatching--A Coupling of Gas Dynamics With
B. M. Middlehurst, eds., Univ. Chicago Press,
the Ablation Process. Paper 68-670, Am. Inst. 196l, pp. 272-342.
Aeron. and Astronaut. Fluid and Plasma Dy- 2-19. COFFEEN, DAVID L.: Wavelength Dependence of
namics Conf. (Los Angeles, Calif.), June 1968.
Polarization. IV: Volcanic Cinders and Particles.
2-9. SENFTLE, F. : Investigation of Infra-Red Absorption
Univ. of Arizona, Commun. Lunar and Planetary
and Low-Angle X-Ray Scattering of Tektites.
Lab., vol. 4, no. 69, Dec. 29, 1964, pp. 157-167.
Semiannual Status Report, NGR 09-11-006, 1967. 2-20. GEHnELS, T. ; COFFEEN, T. ; AND OWINGS, D. : Wave-
2-10. GENTNER, _,V.; LIPPOLT, tl. J.; AND SCHAEFFER, length Dependence of Polarization. III. The Lunar
83
INITIAL PHOTOGRAPHIC ANALYSIS

III: Television D'_ta. JPL TR 32-1023, Nov.


Surface. Astron. J., vol. 69, no. 10, Dec. 1964,
1966. (Also available ._s NASA CR-81520.)
pp. 826-852.
2-37. VAN D[GGELEN, J. : Photometric Properties of Lunar
2-21. ADAMS, JOHN B.; AND FILICE, ALAN L.: Spectral
Crater Floors. NASA TT F-209, 1964.
Reflectance 0.4 to 2.0 Microns of Silicate Rock
2-;_8. IIAPKE, BRUCE : A Theoretical PhotometriC. Function
Powders. J. Geophys. Res., vol. 72, no. 22, Nov.
for the Lunar Surfaee. J. Geophys. Res., vol. 68,
15, 1967, pp. 5705-5715.
no. 15, Aug. 1, 1963, pp. 4571-4586.
2-22. SALISBURY, ,JOHN W.; ANn t[UNT, GRAHAM ]{.:
2-39. WILLINGHAM, e.: The Lunt_r Refleetivity Model for
Martian Surface Materials: Effect of Particle Size
Ranger Block III Analysis. NASA CR-59564,
on Spectral Behavior. Science, vol. 161, no. 3839,
1964.
July 26, 1968, pp. 365-366.
2-40. LowRY, E. M.: The Luminance Discrimination of
2-23. NASH, DOUGLAS B.: Proton-Irradiation Darkening
the Human Eye. J. Soc. Motion Pic. ,rod Telev.
of Rock Powders: Contamination and Temper-
Engrs., vol..57, no. 3, Sept. 1951, pp. 187-196.
ature Effects, and Applications to Solar-Wind
2-41. STEVENS, J. C.; AND STEVENS, S. S.: Brightness
Darkening of the Moon. J. Geophys. Res., vol. 72,
Function: Effects of Adaptation. J. Optical Soe.
no. 12, June 15, 1967, pp. 3089-3104.
Am., vol. 53, no. 3, Mar. 1963, pp. 375-385.
2-24. HAPKE, BRUCE: Lunar Surface: Composition In-
2-42. IRELAND, FRED tt.; KINSLOW, WILLIAM; LEVIN,
ferred From Optical Properties. Science, vol. 159,
EDWIN; AND PAGE, DONALD: Experimental Study
no. 3810, Jan. 5, 1968, pp. 76-79.
nf the Effects of Surround Brightness and Size
2-25. McCoRD, T. B.: Color Differences on the IAmar
on Visual Performance. Final Report, Mar. 1966-
Surface. Doctoral thesis, Calif. Institute of Tech-
Mar. 1967. (AMRL TR-67-102, CFSTI No. AD
nology, 1968, pp. 1-181.
666045), RCA for AMI{L, Wright-Patterson AFB,
2-26. WHITAKER, E. A.; AND KUII'ER, G. P.: Interpre-
Ohio, Sept. 1967.
tation of ILanger VII Records. Ranger VII, part
2-43. LAMBIOTTE, J. J.; AND TAYLOR, G. R.: A Photo-
II: Experimenters' Analyses and Interpretations.
metric Technique for Deriving Slopes From Lunar
JPL TR 32-700, 1965, pp. 149-154. (Also avail-
Orbiter Photography. Vol. 17, Use of Space
able as NASA CR-62347.)
Systems for Planetary Geology and Geophysics,
2-27. NATHAN, I¢OBERT: Digital Video-Data Itandling.
Robert D. Enzmann, ed., AAS Science and Tech-
JPL TR 32-877, 1966. (Also available as NASA
nology Series (Proceedings of symposium held
CR-71399.)
in Boston, Mass., May 25-27, 1967), c. 1968,
2-28. SELZER, R. H.: Digital Computer Processing of
pp. 205-224.
X-Ray Photographs. JPL TR 32-1028, 1966.
2-44. ANON.: Lunar Orbiter II: Post Mission Photo Sup-
(Also available as NASA CR-80521.)
porting Data. NASA CR-66478, Sept. 1967.
2-29. MINNAERT, _,i. G. J. (H. M. KREMER-PRII_ST, trans.; 2-45. ANON.: Lunar Equatorial Zone Mosaic (LEZ) [Scale
K. E. BRIAN JAY, revision): The Nature of Light
1:2,500,000]. Army Map Service, 1968.
and Colour in the Open Air. Dover Publications,
2-46. ANON.: Apollo Lunar Orbit Chart (ALO), Apollo
Inc. (New York), c. 1954, pp. 230-234. Mission 8 [Scale l:ll,000,000]. Aeronautical
2-30. WHIPPLE, FRED L.: A Radio Telescope and the Chart and Information Center, USAF, 1st ed.,
Heiligenschein. Sky and Telescope, vol. 37, no. 2, 1968.
Feb. 1969, p. 85. 2-47. ANON.: Apollo Lunar Orbital Map (LO/vi) [Scaie
2-31. BARABASHOV, N. P.: The Albedo and Color of the 1:7,500,000]. Aeronautical Chart and Information
Lunar Surface. The Moon. A Russian View. A. V.
Center, USAF, 1st ed., 1968.
Markov, ed., Univ. of Chicago Press, e. 1962, 2-48. ANON.: Lunar Farside Chart (LFC-1) [Scale
pp. 123-156. 1:5,000,000]. Aeronautical Chart and Information
2-32. GEHRELS, T.: Photometric Studies of Asteroids. V. Center, USAF, 2d ed., 1967.
The Light-Curve and Phase Function of 20 2-49. MICHAEL, WILLIAM H., JR.: Physical Properties of
Massalia. Astrophys. J., vol. 123, no. 2, Mar. the Moon as Determined From Lunar Orbiter
1956, pp. 331-338. Data. Presented at 14th General Assembly Int.
2-33. GEHRELS, T. : Photometric Studies of Asteroids. VI. Union Geodesy and Geophys. (Lucerne, Switzer-
Photographic Magnitudes. Astrophys. J., vol. 125, land), Oct. 1967.
no. 2, Mar. 1957, pp. 550-570. 2-50. SJOGREN, WILLIAM L.; TRASK, DONALD _,V.; VEGOS,

2-34. SYTINSKAYA, N. N.: Work Done by the Leningrad CHARLES J.; AND WOLLENHAUPT, WILBUR I{.:

State University Astronomical Observatory on Physical Constants as Determined From Radio


the Physiological Properties of the Eye. Akademiia Tracking of the Ranger Lunar Probes. Vol. 11,
Nauk, SSSR, Izvestiia, Ser. Geogr. i Geofiz., vol. Space Flight Mechanics Specialist Symposium,

6, no. 3, 1952, pp. 116-120. 1966, Maurice L. Anthony, ed., AAS Science and

2-35. FEDORETS, V. A.: Photographic Photometry of the Technology Series, c. 1967, pp. 137-154.

Lunar Surface. Uch. Zap. Kharkov Univ., vol. 42, 2-51. BRAY, T. A.; AND GOUDAS, C. L.: A Contour Map
Based on the Selenodelic Control System of
1952, p. 49.
A.C.I.C. Icarus, vol. 5, no. 5, Sept. 1966, pp.
2-36. STEINBACHER, a. It.; GUNTER, R. L.; SPENCER,
526-535.
R. L.; ET AL.: Surveyor I Mission Report. Part
3
Astronomical and Earth Observations

an international network of lunar observers by


ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS
Barbara M. Middlehurst of the Lunar and Plane-
L. DUNKELMAN AND ROBERT O. HILL tary Laboratory, University of Arizona. A system
A (lemonstralion of tile visibility of lunar fea- for reporting hmar tr,msient events to observers
and to the Science Support Room of the Science
tures in shadow regions is discussed in chapter 1.
The ability to observe under high-contrast and and Applications I)irector'_te, NASA Manned
also under very low light-level conditions during Spacecraft Center, was organized through Robert
the lunar orbit port ion of the flight retluires further Citron, Smithsonian Cenler for Short-Lived Phe-
nomena, Cambridge, Mass. This eonununieation
study. The photographic .tstronomical findings
have alre'My been ([ist,usse(l in chapter 2. In system was employed when the ),loon was under
intense surveillance during the Apollo 8 mission.
addition, the following visual observation is
At this time, the early lunar phase mainly limited
worthy of note.
observation of events to those which occurred at
During the Apollo 8 mission, the comnmnd
favorable locations and which were in sunlight.
module pilot (CMP) observed what is generally
thought to be the zodiacal light and solar eoron:_ Thus, q.strononfical observations of events were
to some extent limited to those that might occur
through the command module telescope just. prior
at Mare Crisium (selenographie coordinates lati-
to sunrise on one of the early revolutions. The
tude 18 ° N, longitude 55 ° E) and at Messier
lunar module pilot (LMP) observed what he
deseribed as a cloud or bright, area in the sky (2 ° S, 46 ° E).
However, on the unillumin-tted side of the
(luring lunar darkness on two sueeessive revo-
lutions. He sketched this area in his log and ver- Moon, observations of anomalous brightening near
Aristarchus (23 ° N, 47 ° E) were reported during
bally deseribed it (luring the photographic tie-
the Apollo 8 mission. Such phenomena were re-
briefing after the mission. Based on correlations
ported for December 21 and 22, 1968, by the
of the spacecraft, attitude and the LMP's position
Observatorio Nacional, Rio tie Janeiro, Brazil.
in the spaeeeraft, it. appears that the LMP was
Similar phenomena near Aristarchus and also at
looking at an area near the south celestial pole.
His star sketch was roughly correlated with a star Grimaldi (66 ° S, 67 ° W) were reported for De-
cember 22 to 25 by California members of Argus
field. The identification of the observed area, if
Astronet.
eorreet, indicates that the LMP observed one of
Because the Apollo 8 crew was watching both
the Magellanie clouds.
Aristarchus and Grimaldi, among other features,
ASTRONOMICAL MOONWATCH for transient events, the reported phenomena were

DURING APOLLO 8 not relayed to Apollo 8. However, Menelaus


(17 ° N, 16 ° E) and Manilius (14 ° N, 9 ° E), which
WILLIAM B. CHAPMAN the crew was not particularly watehing for tran-
sient events, were reported to have similar phe-
More than 30 professional observatories and
nomen'L by Argus Astronet members. An observer
70 private observatories have been organized into
85
86 ANALYSIS t)F APOLLt) 8 PHOTOt;RAPftY AND VISUAl, ()BSERVATIt)N_

TABLE 3-I.--Communications Report Summary

Date, ( Lm.t., ()bserw,r l,ocalion


l)ee. 1968 hr :rain ]((,port

- I - - ]- - m ......

21 .......... 21:00 ' .\lourRo Brazil


22 .......... Brighlening in Aristarchus.
23 :(}0 Mourilhe Brazil Light in Arislarchus.
23 .......... 23:28 Jealt
*Ionlreal While lighl in (;uerieke.
23 ......... 01:30 It, 02:(}(} Wick Soulh Dakola
23 ........ Arislarehus pulsating.
02:00 to 02:31) Kohlenberger California
23 ......... Brightening and dimming in Aristarchus.
02:00 io 02:30 Ilarris California
2;:I ......... Brightening and dimming in Aristarchus.
02:40 Harris California
23 ......... SE quadrant of (-_
,nmaldl

brightened.
01:56 LeIHIlallll
South 1)akota
23 ......... Increase in ArM arehus bright hess.
12:00_o 16:00 Sinvhal India Negative.
23 ......... 14:00 1o 16:00 Kodaikanal India Negative.
:23 ......... ! Ividow'e l)enmark Negative.
23 .........
............. Kozyrev U.S.S.R. Negalive.
23 .........
03:00 lo 03:06 Kohlenl)erger California Aristarchus wenl starlike.
:24 ......... 03:00 t[) 06:00 Bunion tlawaii Negal ire.
24 ......... 03 : 23 1larris California
2,3 ........ Arislarehus hrighlening.
05:00 lo 07:1)0 Universily of Michigan ttawaii Negative.
23 ......... 22 : 00 Jean Montreal
While cone lighl on both sides of Pickering.

at Montreal, Canada, reported another similar PARTICIPANTS


phenomenon at 18 ° S, 12 ° W (near Guericke).
However, since the reports of phenomena at these The partMpating observatories are shown in
three sites were less subslantial than those for table 3 I I. Astronet members provided am,tteur
Aristarchus, none of these reports was relayed to radio communications between U.S. observatories.
Apollo 8. A sunmmry of observations, compiled About 25 :mmteur groups also participated in the
bv Citron, is given in table 3-I. obserwttion efforts.
Prior to the flight, of Apollo 8, the crew had been
alerted to observe those sites within range of the SIGHTINGS
spacecraft where lunar transient events had been
During the translunar trajectory, the conmmnd
reported. Sites where events were more common
and service module (CSM), the four quadrant
were plotted on the Apollo Target of Opportunity panels for the spacecraft lunar-module adapter
Flight Chart. Although these areas were observed
(SLA), and the Saturn IVB (S-IVB) booster
on each revolution where spacecraft "tttitude and
rocket created "t spectacular array of flashing ob-
c.rew activities permitted, no transient events were
jects. No one sighted the CSM in lunar orbit,
reported by the Apollo 8 crew.
but the weather was generally bad. On the return
transearth trajectory, the brightness of the CSM
PRELIMINARY RESULTS OF
again wlrie(t significantly. A record of the tracking
APOLLO 8 OPTICAL TRACKING success is shown in table 3-111.
EXPERIMENT ()n the first night, December 21, most observa-
tories noted at least two 12th-nmgnitude objects
HAROLD B. L[EMOHN
which flashed to 8th to 10th magnitude occa-
INTRODUCTION sionally. Both trailed and tracked photographs
were made so thttt brightness and position data
Several observatories succeeded in sighting and would be av-tilable as "t function of time. ()bserwt-
photographing the Apollo 8 sp'tcecraft during its loire du Pic-(tu-Mi(li sightc(l the spacecraft briefly
hmar mission. This preliminary report contains through ,_ thin cloud layer at 17:10 G.m.t., "rod
a brief "recount of the sighting, tentative interpre-
a strange white cloud appeared on the trajectory
tations, and some conclusions about the program. at 17:30 (;.m.t. Ctttalina ()bservatory tracked "tt
ASTltONOMICAL AND EARTI! OBSERVATIONS 87

"I'AI_LE 3 II.--Professimml Obsermtories Participating in Apollo 8 Optical Tracking Experiment

Pers(mnel
()bservai ory L(ica(ll)ll Telescope

61-in. NASA reflector. (;erard P. Kuiper (Director),


Cahlina ()bservat()ry Tucson, Ariz.
Elizabeth l{oemer.

12- and 14-in. image Allen Ifynek (Director),


Corralit os ()l)serw_t(wy Ires Cruces, N. Mex.
orlhicon. Juslis l)unlap.
72-in. Cassegrain refleclor. K. O. Wright (l)irector),
l)onfinion Astr(q)hysical M(mnl Kol)au, Brilish
(_ordon Walker.
Columbia
Observatory
60-in. image orthicon. l_ol)ert L. Boggess
1 laleakala OI)serwt_ ory Mcmnt Flaleakala, Maul,
llawaii (Director), John
Erickson, Wayne Parsons.
12-in. camera, 20-in. Gary Emerson.
lligh Allilu(te ()bserva_:ory Bo(flder, Coh_.
refractor.

TIIcSOl b Ariz. 36-in. reflector. Arl Iloag (Director).


Kitl Peak ()bserwtlory
.Mount tlamilton, Calif. 36-in. Crossley refleclor. E. J. Wampler.
Lick Observatory
72-in. reflector. John lIall (Director), Peter
l_owell ()bserwtt ory Flagstaff', Ariz.
Boyce, Otto Franz.
S2-in. refleclor. Harlan B. Smitll (Director),
Mcl)omthl ()t)servat(wy Mount Locke, Tex.
l)an Weedman.

43-in. refleeior, 24-in. M. Moulsoulas (l)ireetor),


Observatoirc du Pic-du-.Midi llaHle> Pyrenees, Fra,Jce
refracior. l). F. Gregory, C. Lowe,
Zdenek Kopal.
16- and 24-in. reflectors. George Kocher, Charles
Table Mountain Obserw_lory Table Mountain, Calif.
Capen.
61-in. asl romet rie reflecl or. Gerald E. Kron (Director),
U.S. Naval Observatory Flagstaff, Ariz.
Richard Walker, It. 1).
Ables, J. C. Christy,
James Wray.

TABLI.; 3-III.--Apollo 8 Optical Tracking Record

[s indicates visual/photographic sighting; W indicates observation obscured by weather]

])ate, Dec. 1968


()t)servatory

21 22 23 24 25 26

Catalina .................................... S S ............................... W


Corralitos ................................... S S S W W W"
Kitt Peak ......................................................... • ........ W ....................
Lick ................ W W W W W S
Lowell .................................... S S S ................... W
Mcl)onald ............................................ S .......... i .......... i .........

W W W _/ ......
Pie-du-Midi ................................ S W
S ................ W
Table Mountain ............................ S S
S ................ W
U.S. Naval ................................ S S
S W S W
:M(mnt Wilson ............................. S S
......... , ......... S
Fullerton .............................................. , .........
88 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPtIY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

the sidereal rate and obtained trailed images of some flashes at. about 05:30 G.m.t., which may
three objects on 25 plates of 4X emulsion. Flash have been as bright as fifth magnitude, but no
durations of less than 1 second were noted visually, photographs were obtained. Although most ob-
but photographs show bright periods lasting sev- servatories were ready to operate that night, the
eral seconds. Corralitos ()bservatory obtained weather in the Southwest was generally bad.
photographs of the image-orthicon presentation,
but did not detect flashing as ._ result of long UNCONFIRMED INTERPRETATION
integration time. The U.S. N'Lwfl Observatory
On December 21, the observatories undoubtedly
detected four flashing objects surrounding a cen-
detected some SLA panels, as well as the CSM
tral dim object, but was unable to photograph
more than three objects at one time. Table Moun- and S-IVB. The S-IVB was kept in inertial hold,
tain, Lowell, and Mount Wilson Observatories so that its brightness should have been fairly dim
and steady. The CSM attitude changed slowly, so
also reported sightings and m.tde photographs.
that its diffuse component changed slowly and
On Sunday and Monday, I)ecember 22 and 23,
any bright flashes would be widely spaced. The
only two sources were reported. Their brightness
four SLA panels were blown off in opposite di-
diminished proportionally to the square of the
rections -rod tumbled wildly, which may account
distance so that, near the Moon, the magnitude
for most of the bright flashing sources. The bright
was approximately 14 to 15. Such sources would
cloud which was observed at 17:30 G.m.t. was
be very difficult to detect close to the lunar cres-
produced by venting of the S-IVB.
cent. The two objects were separated by several
On December 26, several tests were made of the
minutes of arc on December 21 and by 20 to 30
orientation thrusters, which may account for
minutes of arc on December 22. This is in ap-
parent agreement with the motion of the CSM some bright flashes. Also, if a water dump had
toward the dark limb and the motion of the taken place, the ensuing cloud of ice crystals
S-IVB toward the bright limb. would account for the bright flash which was
reported. The solar position and spacecraft orien-
The transearth trajectory was marked by a
wide range of brightness on l)ecembcr 26. At tation were more favorable during this phase of
the mission, so that the reflection was generally
Lick Observatory, 150 minutes of television tape
brighter than on December 21.
were filmed with a video camera on the 120-inch
telescope. Lick reported magnitudes varying from
DISCUSSION OF PHOTOGRAPHS
10 to less than 17, the threshold of the Lick
instrument. Fullerton, Calif., reported a highly The dates, times, and distances of the Apollo
variable source averaging about l lth magnitude spacecraft from the Earth in the photographs
and fading oecasionally below the Fullerton instru- presented as figures 3-1 to 3-9 are shown in
ment threshold of 13th magnitude. Fullerton saw table 3-IV.

TABLE 3-IV.--Data for Selected Photographs

(_.m.t., Date, Approximate


Figure no. hr : rain Dec.1968 distance from
Earth, km

3-1 .......................................................... 02:01 22 118000


3-2 .......................................................... 03:01 22 128000
3-3 ..........................................................
03:16 22 129 000
3 -4 .......................................................... 01:55 23 255 000
02:05 23 255000
3-6 .......................................................... 02:34 23 260 000
02:36 23 260000
3-8 .......................................................... 02:24 24 350 000
3-9 .......................................................... 05:24 27 122 000
ASTRONOMICAL AND EARTH OBSERVATIONS 89

FmUR_: 3-1 ,--CSM, S-IVB, and one SLA panel at 02:01 G.m.t. on December 22, 1968.

The photographs in figures 3-1, 3-4, and 3-5 flashing) are trailed against the stellar background
were taken at Catalina Observatory, Tucson, in this 2-minute exposure. They are separated
Ariz., with the 61-inch NASA reflector. Corralitos by 3 minutes of arc, or a minimum of 100 kin.
Observatory, Las Cruces, N. Mex., supplied the North is at the top right of this photograph, and
the apparent motion with respect to the star field
photographs in figures 3-2 and 3-6. These photo-
graphs were taken with the Corralitos 24-inch is to the southeast (left).
reflector coupled to an image-orthicon light in- In figure 3-2, two photographs taken 150 sec-
tensifier. The photographs in figures 3-3, 3-7, onds apart are superimposed with the star field
and 3-8 were taken at the U.S. Naval Observa- displaced vertically to show the apparent motion
tory at Flagstaff, Ariz., with a 61-inch reflector. of five objects. Objects 1 and 2, which are not
The photograph in figure 3-9 was taken at Lick resolved here, are thought to be the CSM and
Observatory, Mount Hamilton, Calif., with a 36- one SLA panel; objects 3 and 5 are additional
inch Crossley reflector. panels; and object 4 is the S-IVB booster. The
In figure 3-1, the CSM (center), the S-IVB apparent stellar magnitude of the objects ranges

(right, very faint), and one SLA panel (left, approximately between 11 and 14.

FIGURE 3-3.--CSM, S-IVB, and one SLA panel at 03:16


Fm_E 3-2.--CSM (1), SLA panels (2) (3) (5), and
G.m.t. on December 22, 1968.
S-IVB (4) at 03:0] G.m.t. on December 22, 1968.
9O
ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

In figure 3-3, the CSM (center), the S-IVB in the 2-minute exposure in figure 3-4. At this
booster (upper right), and one SLA panel (lower distance, the spacecraft is moving slightly faster
left) have an apparent stellar magnitude of 12 than the sidereal rate, so that its apparent motion
to 14. The dotted appearance of the images in is toward the southwest with north at the top.
this 5-minute exposure is caused by stepping the The S-IVB booster is tumbling nearby and is not
telescope drive at the apparent rate of motion of visible.
the spacecraft. In figure 3-5, the telescope has been driven to
The CSM, which has an apparent stellar magni- compensate for the apparent motion of the CSM
tude of 13 to 14, is trailed against the star field (below) and the S-IVB (above). The apparent
separation is only 2.5 minutes of arc, but the
linear separation is about 2000 km, since the
S-IVB will pass in front of the Moon and the
CSM will pass behind.
Apollo 8 is seen in figure 3-6 at 02:34 G.m.t.
on December 23, about 260 000 km from the
Earth. Four frames of the image-orthicon presen-
tation spaced at 10-minute intervals have been
superimposed to show the apparent motion of

FI(_aE 3-4.--CSM at 01:55 G.m.t. on December 23, 1968.

FIGUttE 3-6.- Four frames superimposed to show apparent


FIGURE 3-5.--CSM and S-IVB at 02:05 G.m.t. on motion of CSM at 02:34 G.m.t. on December 23,
December 23, 1968. 1968.
ASTRONOMICAL
ANDEARTllOBSERVATIONS 91

the CSM. The apparent, curvature of the orbit.


is caused by the angular motion of the observatory.
In figure 3-7, the CSM (below) and the S-IVB
(above) are moving to the southwest, with north
at the top right. The vehicle reflections have an
apparent stellar nmgnitude of 13 to 14, but be-
cause of the trailing, their image brightness is
dimmed. Note that the brightness of the S-IVB
varies considerably as it tumbles, whereas the
brightness of the CSM changes slowly.

FIGURE 3-8.--CS_,_ at 02:24 G.m.t. on December 24, 1968.

FIGURE 3-7.--CSM and S-IVB at 02:36 G.m.t. on


December 23, 1968.

In the 5-minute exposure of figure 3-8, the


CSM, which has an apparent stellar magnitude
of 14 to 15, is being tracked, and the stars are
trailed. The spacecraft is only 3 ° northeast of
the Moon at this time, so that the gradation of
the background brightness is caused by scattered FIGURE 3-9.--Dotted trail of CSM at 05:24 G.m.t. on
moonlight. December 27, 1968.

Sixteen photographs of a television monitor


taken at 10- to 20-second intervals were super- CONCLUSIONS
imposed to obtain the dotted trail of the CSM,
The feasibility of optical tracking for Apollo
which has an apparent stellar magnitude of 10
missions to the Moon was confirmed by the ob-
to 12 (fig. 3-9). The motion is toward the north-
servatory sightings. Unfortunately, the vagaries
east (upward).
92 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAP]IY AND VISUAl, OBSERVATIONS

of weather remain a deterrent to routine utility


Baker-Nunn camera in San Fernando, Spain,
of optical tracking. The brightness estimates
made a series of photographs that show the CSM,
which were reported are in reasonable agreement
the S-IVB rocket body, several SLA panels, and
with some crude theoretical estimates which pre- the large clouds forme(t by the ejectio'n of the
ceded the flight. It is unlikely that the Apollo rocket's cryogenics. At that time, the distance of
spacecraft can be monitored optically in lunar the objects from the Earth was of the order of
orbit, since the lunar crescent is too bright for 50 Mm. In a(hlitioii, approximately 75 ot)ser-
discrimination. However, if the bright flashes can
vations were made visually by Moonwatch ob-
be attributed to special attitudes, thrusts, or
servers in the United States, Great Britain, and
water dumps, it may be possible to track optically Western Europe. This paper describes the Baker-
for brief periods near the lunar disk.
Nunn camera system, the observ'ttions that were
The actual trajectory for this mission was very made, tul<l the (lata derive<t.
close to the nominal trajectory predicted in ad-
vance. Discrepancies of only a few minutes of arc THE BAKER-NUNN CAMERA
were noted on December 21 and 26, but the shift
The Baker-Nunn camera (fig. 3-10) is an f/1
remained well within the field of most telescopes.
Schnfidt-type system with a three-element cor-
The accurate position data plus the rapidly vary-
recting lens, a spherical mirror, and an a,spherical
ing source made identification and tracking rela-
tively easy with moderate-sized instruments. The focal surface. With a focal length of approximately
50 cm, the camera ha._ a plate _ale of approxi-
spacecraft position can be verified immediately
mately 2.4g per second of arc_ The Apollo 8
with an accuracy of 4-10 are seconds in a good
observations were made with Kodak 2475 record-
star field, and an accuracy of 4-0.1 arc second is
ing fihn, more commonly known as Royal-X Pan
achievable with photographic plate measurements.
extended red. The time of each exposure is re-
Future interest in optical tracking will depend
corded directly on the film and is related to
on how effectively the data from Apollo 8 tracking
can be used by NASA, whose interest was gener-
ated by the desire to determine the feasibility of
visual boresighting on the spacecraft. Evidently,
this is possible during translunar and transearth
trajectories. During lunar orbit, it is unlikely
unless special arrangements can be made to en-
hance the source brightness. Hopefully, this or
some other technical application of optical track-
ing will prove useful.

SMITHSONIAN OBSERVATIONS
OF APOLLO 8 NEAR EARTH

STAFF, SMITHSONIAN ASTROPHYSICAL

OBSERVATORY, AND

OTHA H. VAUGHAN, JR.

INTRODUCTION

On December 21, 1968, the Smithsonian Astro-


physical Observatory (SAO) photographed events
associated with the Apollo 8 translunar mission.
The Baker-Nunn camera in Hawaii photographed
the firing of the S-IVB that accelerated the space-
craft out of Earth orbit and into a translunar
FIGURE 3-10.--Baker-Nunn satellite tracking camera and
trajectory. Approximately 2 hours later, the a typical installation.
ASTt{ON()M1CAL AND EARTH ()E, SERVATIONS 93

TABLE 3 V.-- Coordinates of Baker-Nunn Cameras

Station Nmnber X, Mm Y, Mm Z, Mm

5.105593 -0.555232 3.769674


San Fernando, Sl)ain ............................ 9004
--5.466055 -2.404275 2.242170
Maul, Hawaii ................................. 9012

Greenwich mean time -tt ('anti)ridge with an


accuracy of better than 1 msec.
Two of the observatory's Baker-Nunn cameras
were used to nmke the observations describe<l in
this paper. Their coordinates (ref. 3-1) are given
in table 3-V.

THE OBSERVATIONS

Mission Events Related to Mount Haleakala


Photography
The Smithsonian astrophysical observing sta-
tion on Mount Haleakala on the island of Maui,
Hawaii, ,tcquire(l the Apollo S spacecraft at
15:44:31 G.m.t., shortly after it at)peared over
the horizon. At that time, the translunar injection
(TLI) burn of the S-IVB was ,dready in progress.
However, the spacecraft was still in the penumbra
of the shadow of the E'trth.
While the spacecraft was visible, the Baker-
Nunn camera made 0.4-secon(t exposures every
2 seconds. For accur'tte tinting, each image was
"chopped" at five points by the rotating shutter
of the camera. The images are slightly trailed 1. Start of photography by Hawaii station, showing the
because of the rapid app,trent motion of the TLI burn in progress.

spacecraft.. 2. End of photography by Hawaii station just prior to


end of TLI burn.
The photographic record continued for several
3. Inertial attitude for separation of the CSM and TLI
minutes as the spacecraft reached its nmximunt
booster stage.
elevation approximately 17 ° above the horizon 4. Separation of CSM and jettison of SLA panels; dis-
and then finally disappeared beh)w the st.'ttion tance from surface of Earth approximately 7017 kin.
horizon. The sunlit exhaust, fronl the booster was 5. Rotation of CSM to be able to observe the TLI
booster and perform the mission.
reported to be visually as bright as the full Moon.
6. Position of CSM and TLI booster stage after second
Figure 3 11 is a schematic (ff selected events evasive maneuver and prior to programed liquid oxygen
(luring the Hawaii and Spain photography. Figures dump; CSM above and behind the TLI booster.
3-12 to 3-17 show six representative frames taken 7. Attitude of TLI booster at time of programed liquid
by the camera in Hawaii. In figure 3-12, the oxygen dump event.
8. Start of San Fernando, Spain, photography.
spacecraft appears as a chopped trail emerging
from the shadow of the Earth. The second and 9. Relative geometry of CSM, cloud, and TLI boost
stage at approximately 18:28 G.m.t.
third frames show "profiles" of tim rocket exh'tttst.
The effects of the chopping shutter are visible in FxGtJrtn 3-11.--Schematic of selected events of Hawaii
and Spain photography during the Apollo 8 mission.
figure 3-13, breaking the exhaust cone int<) dis-
(,)4 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

FIGURE 3-14.--CSM and S-IVB during translunar


injection.

crete segments 'is the spacecraft moved across the


sky. Figure 3-14 shows the CSM and S-IVB
during TLI. Figures 3-15 and 3-16 show a some-
FIGURE 3-12.--CSM and S-IVB during burn of S-IVB
J-2 engine. what changed geometry, the observations having
been ma(le nearly parallel to the velocity vector
(if tile spacecraft. The slight trailing of the image
blurred the ray structure in the vertical direction,
but rays arc clearly visible in the horizontal di-
rection, parallel to the trailing.

FIGURE 3-13.--CSM and S-IVB immediately after FIGURE 3-15. l,ooking up exhaust plume during burn of
entering sunlight. S-IVB J-2 engine.
ASTRONOMICAL AND EARTH OBSERVATIONS (,)5

FI(i U RE :_-17.--Spacecraft immediately before disappearing


behind mountain on horizon.

FI(_UI_E 3-16.--S-IVB J-2 engine t)urn.


graphs, the events which occurred prior to the
photography and those events which are related
Finally, tigure 3-17 shows the spacecraft just to the photography will be discussed.
as it was disappearing behind a mountain on the At the time of the TLI (15:47:06 G.m.t.), which
horizon. The next frame (not reproduced here) occurs at the S-IVB J-2 engine cutoff+ 10 seconds
still showed the ray structure even though the (15:46:56), the CSM and the boost stage were
apex of the exhaust cone was ot)scured by the traveling tit a space-fixed velocity of 10 822.05
horizon. m/see while at an altitude of 346.73 km (based
The exposure times for the frames in figures on a spherical Earth radius of 6378.165 km (ref.
3-12 to 3-17 were as follows: figure 3-12, 15:44:31 3-2). After a coast time of 10 seconds (approxi-
G.m.t.; figure 3-13, 15:44:45; figure 3-14, nmtely 15:47:16 G.m.t.), the vehicle began to
15:44:59; figure 3-15, 15:45:47; figure 3-16, orient itself for the local horizontal attitude ma-
15:46:03; and figure 3-17, 15:46:09. neuver and began orbital navigation. After coast-
ing until 16:01:58, the CSM and boost vehicle
Mission Events Related to the San Fernando, I)egan the required maneuver for separation atti-
Spain, Photographs tude. While at this inertial attitude, the CSM
and boost stage were separated and the SLA
The Smithsonian astrophysical observing st,t-
tion at San Fernando, Spain, observed Apollo 8 panels were jettisoned. Just prior to the actual
for almost 2 hours beginning shortly after 18:00 separation event, the CSM and boost stage were
traveling at a space-fixed velocity of 7616.85 m/see
G.m.t. on December 21.
while at an altitude of 7018.6 km from the surface
Moonwatch Headquarters received a report
that a cloud was first visible in England at about of the Earth.
17:48 G.m.t. and, at its brightest, reached ap- The CSM separated from the boost stage at
16:11:59 G.m.t., and the astronauts then used the
proximately zero magnitude. A smaller cloud esti-
mated at fourth magnitude was also reported. four jet engines of the reaction control system
At the time of first ground acquisition at (RCS) for separation propulsion. After performing
18:07:36 G.m.t., photography indicated that the a null I)urn and the programed evasive maneuver,
at approximately 16:31:00, the CSM was about
"slingshot" maneuver of the S-IVB stage had
300 meters from the TLI boost stage. At 16:46:56,
been performed and that the liquid oxygen dump
the boost stage began its programed liquid hy-
and portion of events for "sating" the S-IVB
(trogen vent prior to performing the "slingshot"
stage had been performed. In the following para-
96 ANALYSIS ()F AI'OLLO 8 PttOTO(H_.APIIY AND VISUAl, ()BSEI_.VATIONN

nlaneuver. This event is a nonpropulsive vent and, burned until 18:29:34, and ,nodule engine 2 burne(t
at the time of the start of this event, there were until 18:29:08. Approximately 220 kg of pro-
approximately 1440 kg liquid hydrogen and ullage pellants were consumed during this burn sequence.
gaseous hydrogen on board the })oost stage. The The "slingshot" maneuver resulting from the
liquid hydrogen vent operation lasted until liquid hydrogen vent, the liquid oxygen dump,
17:01:56, at which time it was ternfinated. A tot.fl and the APS ull'_ge burn caused the TLI boost
of 1437 kg of liquid and gaseous hydrogen was stage to ac(tuire a retrovelocity of 41.9 m/see.
vented. The astronauts observed this event an(l At 18:19:16 G.m.t., the ('SM could be seen on
noted it as "spectacular..., spewing out from the tracking film, and by 18:20:54, the S-IVB
all sides like a huge water sprinkler." At 17:36:00, wax visible emerging from the ehmd forme(I by
a second evolve maneuver, which had been re- the liquid oxygen dump.
quested by the astronauts, was performed. This At 18:54:03 G.m.t., the ambient helium in the
maneuver placed the CSM at approximately 1000 liquid oxygen 'uld liquid hydrogen tank repressuri-
meters slant range above and behind the TLI zation spheres was dumped via the liquid hy-
boost stage (fig. 3-11).
(lrogen t'mk. This dump lasted for 200 seconds,
At 17:46:60 G.m.t., the liquid hydrogen con- and approximately 28 kg of helium was dumped
tinuous vent valves were opened prior to the start during this time.
of the programed liquid oxygen dump. At At 18:57:24 (km.t., the .I-2 engine control
17:58:56, the "slingshot" AV mode of the I)oost sphere was vented. This event requires about 300
stage was started by opening the main liquid seconds vent duration. Approximately 0.9 kg of
oxygen valve and using ullage gas prcssurization helium was ventc_d. After all of the programed
to force the liquid oxygen through the engine dumps of propellants and other gases from the
injector plate and out through the nozzle throat TLI boost stage had been completed, the inert
and the expansion skirt of the J-2 engine. At stage weighed 23 670 kg. The last frame that
17:59:25, the J-2 engine start sphere was vented, shows the S-IVB was taken at lq:07:52. The
and a total of 1.8 kg of gaseous hydrogen was CSM is last seen on a frame taken at 19:08:24,
dumped. This event took "tpproximately 150 sec- and the ch)ud (lisappeared at about lq:54:26.
onds. During the main liquid oxygen dump Observ:_tions ended approximately 4 minutes
through the engine, a steady-state liquid flow r'_te later. Two other objects are visible intermittently,
of 1.4 m3/sec was reached in 40 seconds. After 126
one of thenl between 18:21:18 and 18:33:04, and
seconds of dump, gas ingestion was indicated by the other bet ween 18:35:32 and 18:49:03.
a sudden flow-rate increase. After 150 seconds of
Figure 3 18, a frame exposed for 1.6 seconds,
dump, approximately 3329 kg of liquid o_,gen is typic,t] of the frames taken between about
had been dumped. Ullage gases continued to be 18:20 :rod 19:07. The large cloud maintained its
dumped until the time of programed liquid oxygen characteristic "mushroom" shape (luring most of
dump ending (by closing the nmin liquid oxygen the observing period. Slightly above it and to the
value) at 18:03:56. At this time, "_pproximately right is the smaller butterfly-shaped cloud with
200 kg of gaseous oxygen ullage gases relnained the brighter S-IVB at its center. Between the
in the liquid oxygen tank.
S-IVB an(l the large cloud, ahnost directly on
At 18:03:59 G.m.t., the liquid oxygen nonpro- line with the "stem" of the large cloud, is the
pulsive vent valve was opened and renmined open starlike CSM.
for the duration of the mission. At 18:04:04, cold
DATA
helium gas was dumped overbo._rd through the
liquid hydrogen tank and its vent system. Ap- Thirty-four positionsof the CSM and 32 po-
proximately 64 kg were dumped, and the time sitionsof the S-IVB were preciselymeasured in
required for this dumt) was '_pproxinmtely 3000 Cambridge; the observatory's standard proce-
seconds.
(lures for photoreducing satellite inmges were used
At 18:16:56 G.m.t., the S-IVB auxiliary pro- (ref. 3-3).
pulsion system (APS) ullage engines 1 and 2 were Tables 3-VI, 3-VII, and 3-VIII list observed
commanded to start a burn. Module engine 1 positions of lhe CSM, the S-IVB, and two SLA
97
ASTRONOMICAL AND EARTII OBSERVATIONS

panels. The accuracy of the observations from


Maul, Hawaii (station 9012), is assumed to be
4-150 arcsec because of the absence of a point

source. The reductions from San Fernando, Spain

(station 90041, are considered to be of precisely

reduced quality with an assigned standard devi-

ation of 4-4 arcsec.


The time accuracy of the observations (G.m.t.)

depends primarily on the stability of the station


clock and on the reception of the time signals.

Uncertainties estimated according to these criteria

vary from 4-0.5 to -4-20 msec, with an average


value of 4-2 msec (ref. 3-4).

The positions in columns 4 and 5 of tables 3-VI

3-VII, and 3-VIII refer to the mean equator and

equinox of 1950.0 in the fundamental system of

FK-4 (ref. 3-5). All satellite positions after August

31, 1962, have been reduced with the SAO Star


Fiol_n v 3-18.--S-I V B, showing cloud formed by blowdown
Catalog (ref. 3-6), which is in the FK-4 system.
maneuver.

TABLE 3-VI.--CSM Positions

Declination, rms,
(kmA., rillS, Right
Date, hr:min :see _' See of Station
hr: rain : see msee " ascension,
yr : mo :day arc c
hr : min : sec _'

-50 43 0.00 150 9012


15 44 31.4460 10 II 42 42.000
1968 12 21 150 9012
ll 51 24.000 -50 18 0.00
12 21 15 44 33. 4480 10
-49 37 0.00 150 9012
15 44 35.4510 10 12 1 24.000
12 21
- 49 0 0.00 150 9012
10 12 l0 54.00O
12 21 15 44 37.4530
-46 42 0.00 150 9012
10 12 38 18.000
12 2l 15 44 43.4620

-45 52 0.00 150 9012


15 44 45.4650 10 12 47 24.000
12 21 150 9012
13 4 24.000 -43 56 0.00
12 21 15 44 49.4700 10
-38 26 0.00 150 9012
15 44 59.4850 10 13 45 0.00O
12 21 150 9012
14 19 36.000 -32 16 0.00
15 45 9.5020 10
12 21 150 9012
14 58 30.000 -23 29 0.00
15 45 23.5200 10
12 21

- 17 44 0.00 150 9012


15 45 33.5330 10 15 20 30.000
12 21
-11 43 0.00 150 9012
15 45 45.5480 10 15 42 6.000
12 21
- 6 39 0.00 150 9012
15 45 57.5620 10 15 59 54.000
12 21
-2 33 0.00 150 9012
15 46 9.5790 10 16 14 12.000
12 21
1 50 51.07 4 9004
1 20 22 14.963
12 21 18 19 16.0247

l 45 14.33 4 9004
20 23 6.045
12 21 18 21 10.7077
1 42 47.21 4 90O4
20 23 44.607
12 21 18 22 41.1831
1 36 37.94 4 9004
20 24 57.796
12 21 18 25 27.6893
1 34 18.78 4 9004
20 25 23.845
12 21 18 26 29.8132
l 32 54.85 4 9004
2(1 25 45.787
12 21 18 27 28.6320

1 31 50.29 4 9004
18 28 .6320 211 25 59.243
12 21 9004
1 29 27.34 4
20 26 25.610
12 21 18 29 4.6319 9OO4
1 28 15.01 4
18 29 36.6317 20 26 38.522
12 21 4 9004
20 28 .114 1 20 55.64
12 21 18 32 48.6313
4 9O04
20 28 22.423 1 19 9.76
12 21 18 33 56.3477
98 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAl, OBSERVATIONS

TABLE 3-VI.--CSM P os_twns--Co


" " ' n t l n ued

Date, G.nl.t., rms, Right Declination,


yr: mo: day hr: rain :set, IVl sec a
rms,
ascension, hr:min:sec b sec of Station
hr:min :sec _ are e

12 21 18 34 44. 3482 1 20 28 41.027 1 17 29.80 4 9004


12 21 18 35 32. 3480 1 20 28 59.799 1 15 54.40 4 9004
12 21 18 36 20.3479 1 20 29 18.293 l 14 15.10 4 9004
12 21 18 37 24.3484 1 20 29 43.296 1 12 37.71 4 9004
12 21 18 38 44. 3477 1 20 30 15.788 1 8 40.58 4 90O4

12 21 18 39 3.3233 1 20 3O 22.873 1 8 6.28 9004


12 21 18 39 55.0126 1 20 30 42.298 l 6 22.29 9004
12 21 18 40 59.0137 1 20 31 5.512 1 4 13.15 4 9004
12 21 18 41 47.0147 1 20 31 21.552 1 4 • 88 4 9004
12 21 18 44 19.5074 1 20 32 18.422 0 57 47.00 4 9004

12 21 18 47 59.1986 1 20 33 36. 888 50 55.07 4 9004


12 21 18 48 47. 1998 1 20 33 50.418 50 46.04 4 9004
12 21 18 51 37.8318 1 20 34 50. 575 44 13.70 4 9004
12 21 18 52 41.8321 1 20 35 11. 905 42 16.72 4 9004
12 21 18 53 13.8324 1 211 35 19.331 42 .28 4 9004

12 21 18 54 15.0331 1 20 35 39.447 40 20.34 4 9004


12 21 18 55 3.0330 1 20 35 54.996 38 47.97 4 9004
12 21 18 55 51.0358 1 20 36 6.567 42 35.59 4 9004
12 21 18 57 11.0351 1 20 36 38.483 37 38.58 4 9004
12 21 18 58 11.6707 l 20 36 56.309 33 16.88 4 9004

12 21 19 2 43.4079 1 20 38 21.351 0 26 16.73 4 9004


12 21 19 5 19.5754 1 20 39 9.068 0 21 20.45 4 9004
12 21 19 17 2.4777 1 20 42 32.605 0 2 45.48 4 9004
12 21 19 18 4.8330 l 20 42 51.020 0 1 6.74 4 9004
12 21 19 19 48.4194 l 20 43 47.052 -0 5 20.71 4 9004

12 21 19 20 27.6810 l 20 43 29.032 -0 19.24 4 9OO4

i Standard error of time.

b Topocentric coordinates with reference to mean equator and equinox of 1950.0.


Standard error of position.

The positions have not been corrected for paral- 3. Right ascension of ascending node =
lactic refraction; the correction seldom exceeds
(141-590°+0.016 °) -0.0073 ° (T- To)
2 seconds of arc.
4. Inclination = 30.739436 °
From these data, preliminary orbital elements 5. Eccentricity = 0.975975
were derived by using the December 10, 1968, 6. Mean anomaly (in revolutions)=
version of the SAO differential orbit improvement
(0.007819±0.000051) +(0.06245±
(DOI) program (refs. 3-7 and 3-8). The following 0.00055) (T- To)
are the preliminary orbital elements for the CSM:

The standard error of unit weight is 6.56 with


1. To = December 21,
34 observations used. The following are the pre-
18:46:05.061 G.m.t.
liminary orbit:d elements for the S-IVB:
2. Argument of perigee = (29.15°+ 1 l)
+0.011455 ° (T- To) 1. T0=Deeember 21, 18:46:05.061 G.m.t.
99
ASTRONOMICAL
ANDEARTH
OBSERVATIONS
TABLE 3-VII.--S-IVB Positions

Right Declination, r 111 S,


Date, (1.m.t., l,nl8 I
sec of Station
ascension, hr: min : sec l,
yr: mo: day hr: rain :sec ]I1SC'e a

hr : rain : see _' arc c

1 52 24.25 4 9004
18 11,I 16.0254 20 22 4.834
196_ 12 21
1 48 10.34 4 9004
18 21 10.7088 20 22 55.616
12 21
20 22 58.942 1 47 52.46 4 9004
12 21 18 21 18.71187
1 44 49.46 4 (,}004
18 22 41.1847 20 23 34. 536
12 21
1 39 25.32 4 9004
18 25 11.61`t04 2(} 24 38. 285
12 21

1 38 49.80 4 9004
12 21 18 25 27.69(17 20 24 45.102
1 36 30.39 4 9004
12 21 18 26 29.8137 21) 25 10.550
1 34 33.66 4 9004
12 21 18 27 28. 6334 20 25 34.863
1 33 20.26 4 9004
12 21 18 28 .6333 20 25 47. 552
1 31 14.65 4 9004
12 21 18 29 4.6334 20 26 13.638

1 30 1.51 4 9004
12 21 18 29 36. 6332 20 26 26.750
1 23 26.50 4 9004
12 21 18 ;32 48. 6334 20 27 42.82(,}
20 27 49.015 1 22 54.26 4 (,t004
12 21 18 33 4.6331
1 21 19.53 4 9004
12 21 18 33 56. 3495 20 28 7.468
1 19 46.43 4 9004
18 34 44. 3500 20 28 26.002
12 21

1 18 12.40 4 9004
18 35 32. 35110 20 28 43. (.}53
12 21
1 16 33.71 4 9004
18 36 20.34(`}9 20 29 2. 222
12 21
1 15 3.56 4 9004
18 37 8.3500 20 29 20. 076
12 21
1 14 31.94 4 9004
18 37 24. 3501 20 29 26. 000
12 21
1 13 29.79 4 9004
1_, 37 56. 3499 20 29 37. 637
12 21

1 11 59.20 4 9004
12 21 18 38 44. 35114 20 29 55. 3313
1 ll 20.95 4 9004
12 21 18 39 3.3246 20 311 2.141
1 9 43.33 4 9004
18 39 55.0154 20 30 21.032
12 21
1 7 42.82 4 9004
12 21 18 40 59,0165 20 3() 44.240
l 1 28.08 4 9004
12 21 18 44 19.5(181.} 20 31 55.135

0 54 51.42 4 9004
18 47 59.2018 20 33 10.566
12 21
0 53 25.72 4 9004
18 48 47. 2021 20 33 26.739
12 21
0 52 55.67 4 9004
18 49 3. 2019 20 33 31.983
12 21
0 29 46.10 4 9004
19 2 43.4107 20 37 52.541
12 21
0 25 37.19 4 90O4
12 21 1,(1 5 1:t.5787 20 38 38. 885

0 7 46.69 4 9004
12 21 19 17 2.4813 20 41 57.844
0 6 8.19 4 9004
19 18 4.8367 20 42 15.566
12 2l
0 3 44.71 4 9004
19 19 48.42611 20 42 42.679
12 21
0 2 47.54 4 9004
12 21 19 20 27.6848 2(} 42 52.920

Standard error of time.


b Topoeentrie coordinates with reference to mean equator and equinox of 1950.0.
Standard errm" of posilion.

2. Argument of perigee = (28.0980-4-0.087 °) + 6. Mean anomaly (in revolutions)=


0.011455 ° (T-To) (0.008313::1=0.000048)+(0.06655+
3. Right ascension of ascending node = 0.00053) (T-To)
(141.5563°-4-0.0033 °) - 0.00731 ° (T - To)
4. Inclination = 30.816°±0.044 ° The standard error of unit weight is 0.97 with
32 observations used.
5. Eccentricity = 0.975975
1O0
ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

TABLE 3- VIII.--Adapter-Panel Positions

Date, FYIISj Right I)eelination, rlns_


yr:mo:day Inset a ascension, hr: rain :see k, sec of Station
hr : rain : see _' arc c
i

Panel A

1968 12 21 18 21 18.7083 20 23 8.247 1 47 9.39 4 9004


12 21 18 25 11.6899 20 24 4.(}.543 1 38 22.26 4 9004
12 21 18 28 .6322 20 26 .398 1 32 16.21 4 9004
12 21 18 29 4.6322 20 26 25..(t66 1 29 54.69 4 9004
12 21 18 33 4.6318 20 28 2. 994 1 21 29.68 4 9004

12 21 18 36 20.3482 20 29 18.952 1 14 46.8(/ 9004


12 21 18 53 13.8328 20 35 19.672 0 42 41.113 9004

Panel B

1968 12 21 18 35 32.3475 20 29 2.991 1 15 8.56 4 9004


12 21 18 36 20.3474 20 29 21.251 1 13 28.90 4 9004
12 21 18 36 52.3475 20 2(9 33.476 1 12 27.75 4 9004
12 21 18 37 8.3474 20 29 39.498 1 ll 55.65 4 9004
12 21 18 37 24.3475 20 29 45.796 1 ll 23.64 4 9004

12 21 18 37 56.3473 20 29 57.783 10 18.15 4 9004


12 21 18 48 47.1989 20 33 52.875 49 24.85 4 9004
12 21 18 49 3.1987 20 33 56.879 48 54.11 4 9004
12 21 18 55 3.0325 20 35 58.943 38 4.38 4 9004
12 21 18 55 51.9320 20 36 14.755 36 41.56 4 9004

Standard error of time.


b Topocentric coordinates with reference to mean equator and equinox of 1950.(}.
Standard error of position.

Elements accompanied by errors of two signifi- of the node as determined by the DOI to right
cant figures have been deternfined by the DOI ascension of the node referred to the mean equinox
program. The values of the motions of the argu- of date
ment of perigee and the right ascension of the
node are theoretical, being those given in the _ = _(I)OI)3.508 ° × 10-5(MJD--33 281)

revision to the Apollo 8 Spacecraft Operational where i2 is the right ascension of the node in
Trajectory (Vol. l, "Mission Profile for Dec. 21
degrees and MJD is the modified Julian day.
Launch"). Densitometer scans were made in two directions
In the SAO computer program, the inclination across the image of the cloud on approximately
and the argument of perigee are referred to the
12 frames of the Spanish films. The density profiles
true equator of date; the right :tscension of the
identified the approximate position of the point
ascending node, however, is reckoned from the
of greatest density in each image. They also per-
mean equinox of 1950.0 along the corresponding mitted a reasonably accurate determination of
mean equator to the intersection with the moving the extent of the (,loud in two arbitrary directions,
true equator of date, and then along the true approximately parallel and perpendicular to the
equator of date. To transform from right ascension direction of apparent motion. Table 3-IX gives
101
ASTRONOMICAL AND EARTH OBSERVATIONS

t)e estinmted as follows. At an altitude of 165 kin,


TABLE 3-IX.--Angular Extent of Cloud and
one .m_bient neutral partich' collides with another
Angular Separation of Density Maximum From
every 0.15 second. The gas cloud will possess a
S-IVB
kinetic temperature perhaps a little greater than
Length, Width, Separation, that of the ambient ,ttmosphere. During the ex-
G.m.t.)
arcsec arcsec
hr:min:sec arcsec pansion, an ambient particle will collide with a
plume particle about every 0.001 second; therefore,
334.4
18:14:57 ............................. the ambient particles will be "scooped up" by the
549.8
18:20:02 .............................. expanding cloud, and a shock front will form at
574.8
18:25:11 ........................
647.9 a radius of the order of 1 kin. Many collisions
18:30:08 .... 2508 1254
773.;5 between plume particles occur during the expan-
18:36:04 .... 2508 1254
856. (.) sion, and it is not, therefore, an expansion of the
18:40:11 .... 2508 1254
19:02:59 .... 2194 1097 free-molecule type. The expansion front nmst take
2194 1097
19:09:28 .... the form of a conical surface because of the
downstream (or possibly upstream) translational
velocity of the gas cloud. The velocity of this
the angular extent of the cloud and the angular front nmst be of the order of 2/(7-1) times the
separation of the density maxinmm from the acoustic velocity in the gas cloud (where 3' is the
S-IVB in seconds of arc. ratio of specific heats), which implies a speed of
During the period covered in table 3-IX, the the order of 5 km/sec. This figure fits well with
slant range from the observing station to the the large cone angle that is observed in the exhaust
objects increased from 42 to 54 Mm, approxi- plume.
mately. At the same time, the height of the objects The brightness of the object was described as
above the surface of the Earth increased approxi- "nmch greater than that of the full Moon." An
mately from 39 to 54 Mm. apparent magnitude of - 15 (as compared to - 27
for the Sun and -13 for the full Moon) implies
that the scattering process nmst be capable of
DISCUSSION
producing about 1 percent of the light incident
from the Sun (assuming an isotropic scattering
The Hawaiian photographs of the TLI firing
process). It would be difficult to accomplish this
of the S-IVB show that most of the illunfination
by an inelastic type of scattering process because
originates from a relatively thin conical surface.
of the narrowness of absorption lines. It is more
During the observations, Apollo 8 was approxi-
likely that Rayleigh scattering from crystals of
mately 165 km above the surface of the Earth,
ice is the required mechanism.
where the ambient density is 5X10 -7 g/m 3. The
The rocket exhaust consists largely of water
S-IVB was exhausting approximately 1100 kg/sec
vapor, and at the front of the expanding gas
at a velocity, relative to the rocket, of the order
cloud, cooling must occur that, may be sufficient
of 5 km/sec. If the exhaust gases were contained
to produce ice crystals. Such condensation fronts
in a cylinder of 1-mile radius immediately after
are often observed in wind tunnels. Hotter gas
ejection, the initial density of the gas cloud would
farther behind the front will melt these crystals
be 15 g/m 3. The exhaust gases would, therefore,
so that the crystals will be confined to the expan-
expand, because their density exceeded that of the
sion front. The photographs indicate that the ice
ambient atmosphere by a factor of 3X107. The
crystals are confined to a depth of 500 to 1000
density of the gas cloud would become equal to
meters behind the front. If these ice crystals are
that of the ambient atmosphere after the gas had
about 0.1g size, then a rough calculation indicates
expanded to a radius of approximately 5 kin. This
that there could be a sufficient number of them
is very close to the distance at which the photo-
to produce such a bright object. An upper limit
graphs indicate that the gas cloud had become
on the size of about 0.1tt arises from the obser-
too diffuse to scatter an appreciable amount of
vation that the scattering process appears to be
light.
isotropic.
The dynamics of the gas-cloud expansion can
102
ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PItOTOGRAPItY AND VISUAl, OBSERVATIt)NS

Finally, the rayed struetttre thai appears in tile


of lhese unils (':tn })e seen in the photograph as the
exhaust plume when it is viewed end-on probably })utterfly-sh:q)ed objects ,war the S-IVB.
arises from the mechanisnls for injecting fuel into
A (letaile(l slu(ly of this type of photogr.q)hv
the combusti<)n chamber. If a plasma-type insta-
by gas <lynamieists will allow a better m|de_'-
bility were l)resent, it would pro})ably occttr in "t
st:re(ling of the venting of materials in hard
helical fashion and would not, lherefore, }>e seen
wwmtm and their effects on Sl)acecraft whi(,h may
in this type of observation.
h'q)pen lo 1)(, near (It|ring the venting sche(lule_.
The Spain photography shows the effect of the
Because of lhe many <tuesti(ms raise(l by this
release of unburned cryogenic mat(_rials in vacuum
tyl)e of l)hologr'tphy from the Ap()lh_ g mission,
at an altitude of approximately 43 0()0 km al)ove
more extensive ('_v(,rage is in(tieate(I f.r future
the Earth. At the time of tit(, ph()tograph seen in
m:tm!e(l missions. The results will det)en(1 he;tvilv
figure 3-18, the gas cloud was apl)roxinmtely 214 t)oth on the timing of the st)ace-vehicle maneuvet:s
by 99 km in size and the S IVB auxiliary pro- with r(,sl)(,ct to sum'ise and sunset at the observ.t-
pulsion units were burning. The exhaust plumes
tory stations and on the illumin:tti(m 'doff.

REFERENCES

3-1. LUNDQUIST, C. A.; AND VEIS, G.: Geodetic Param-


3-5. FRICKE, _,V.; ANt) KOI'FF, A.: Fourth Fundamental
eters for a 1966 Smithsonian Standard Earth. SAO
Catalogue. Ver6ff Astron. Reeheu-Inst., Heidel-
Special Rept. no. 200, Dec. 196(i.
berg, no. 10.
3-2. ANON.: Saturn V Launch Vehiele Flight I']vahvttion
3-(i. STAFF OF SMITHSONIAN ASTROPItYSICAL OBSEI-tVA-
Report, AS-503 Apollo 8 Mission. MPR-SAT-
FE-fi9-1, Feb. 1969. TO_C_':Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory Star
Catalog. Smithsoni,m Publication 4652. Smith-
3-3. HaEVNER, R. R.: The Precise Reduction of Baker-
sonian Institution (Washington, D.C.), Mar. 1966.
Nunn Films at the Smithsonian Astrophysie,d Ob-
:{-7. (IAPO,S(!HKIN, I'], ._,I.: Pul)lication of Orbils Derived
servatory. The Use of Artificial Satellites for
From Photoreduced Baker-Nmm Observations.
Geodesy. Vol. II, George Veis, ed., National Tech-
SAO Sp(.cial Rept. no. 232, Dec. 196(i. (Also av'dl-
nical University (Athens), 1967, pp. 81, 83-94.
•tble as NASA CR-82799.)
3-4. LAMBECK, K.; AND McGRaTH, L. J., Ja.: Reduction
3-8. VF._s, G.: The Deflection of the Verti(!al of Major
and Accuracy of Baker-Nunn Observations of
Geodetic D'_tums and the Seminmjor Axis of the
Geos 1. Geodetic Satellite Results I)uring 1967,
Earth's Ellipsoid as Obtained From Satellite Obser-
Charles A. Lundquist, ed., SAO Special Rept. no.
vations. St)ace Research V, D. G. King-tIele, P.
264, Dec. 1967, pp. 145-161. (Also availal)le as
Muller, "tnd G. Righini, eds., North-Itolland Publ.
NASA CR-97155.)
Co. (Amsterdam), 1965, pp. 849-875.
4
Background

_r FRODUC ,r ! _ IO N lift(' itlt(,r(,st t't_r which l)hut()Kr:q)hy was (l(,sir:thh'.


IN
An :l(I h()(' Astronomy Working (h'(mp w:ts ('ou-
RICHARD J. :_.LLENBY vened hy l{ic|u_r(t J. Allenby :d NASA t[(,ad-
(lUt/l't(!FS ()ll ScptOlll_)eF 25 to l'e(_OllillWll(t ttSll'(_-
Under tile gui¢tan(_e (ff the future Project Seiel_-
n()mi('al tasks. These ad ho(' working groups, wit, h
fist, James H. S;tsser, all :t(t ho(' Lttll_tr S(!i('nce
(,xt):tn(te(l l_emi)(q'ships, l:lt(,r were iu('(n'l)or:lt('(l
Working (Iroup w:_s ('()llVt*llOd Se|)telnl)er 0, 1968,
into the three form:tl working _rou|)s (fig. 4-1).
at the Manlled Spacecraft (_enter (MS(_) to con-
Unthq' :l s('itql('e m't]l:lg(qu('nt t)hu_ _q)t)rov('(l [)Y
sider and recomnwud lunar-surface arenas of scieu-

R.Program
Allenby, Scientist
NASA Hq /

I
Program Scientist
interface with
Apollo 8 operations
J. Sasser, MSC

I
Lunar Apollo 8 Science
Advisory Team ILASAD
Chairmar{, J. Sasser, MSC
J. Sevier, MSC
F. Roach, NBS (ret'dl
H. Masursky, USGS
J. Dietrich, MSC
H. Schmitt, MSC

I
r-
I I I I
Lunar Science 1 l Working
Astronomy
Group [ I Lunar
Working
Operations
Group
I Working
Earth Orbital
Group Working Group

I I I I
Chairman, H. Masursky, USGS Chairman, J. Sevier, MSC
Chairman, F. Roach, NBS !ret'di
J. O'Keefe, GSFC J. Burke, JPL
Cnairman, J. Dornbach,MSC] E. Ney, U. Minn
P. Lowman, CSFC F. EI-Baz, Bellcomm G. Newkirk, EAO J. Sasser, g_SC
A. Goetz, Bellcomm D. Lloyd, Bellcomm
E. h_orris, USGS
H. Schmitt, MSC L. Kosofsky, Hq
L. Frederick, U. Va
R. Bryson, Hq O. Vaughan, hISFC
L. Dunkelman, GSFC
J. Dietrich, MSC G. Swann, USGS
T. Page, MSC
G. Tyler, Stanford U. R. Stromm, U. Ariz
J. Gill, Hq
E. _.Nhitaker, U. Ariz H. Trask, USGS
M. Dubin, Hq
W. N'fichall, LRC
D. Wilhelms, USGS

FI(_Ut_.E 4-1.--Apollo 8 science mant_gement plan.

103
104 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPHY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

the Associate Administrator for Science, John E. i. One 2A filter


Naugle, on December 17, 1968, the working j. One 47B blue filter
groups were organized to reflect the key areas of k. One 25A red filter
interest in :
I. ()no intervalometer (20-second interval)
l. Operational photography related to present 3. One camera mounting bracket
and future Apollo landing sites 4. One spotmeter (narrow-angle exposure meter)
2. Scientific photography 5. Onc television camera
3. Astronomy
Briefing papers had been prepared covering
The obvious overlapping interests of these phenomena that the crew should search for visu-
groups were coordinated by the advisory team ally. Oral briefings on some of these subjects were
chaired by James H. Sa_ser. This advisory team inserted il_to the astronauts' crowded preflight
was also responsible for briefing the a.stronauts schedule. It was clearly understood by everyone
on the proposed tasks and for consulting with and connected with the mission that the science tasks
advising the crew and the flight operations team would be performed only on a "target of oppor-
on scientific problems (luring the mission. tunity" basis. It was also apparent that the astro-
The mission flight plan for Apollo 8 provided nauts might be "overprogramed" and would have
alternatives as a series of success "steps." The difficulty performing all of the tasks requested,
success of each step determined the actions to even if no unexpected problems arose (luring the
follow. Thus, if problems that precluded a lunar- mission. The crew's performance was outstanding,
orbital mission arose before translunar injection, although they were tired when they arrived in
an Earth-orbital mission would be conducted. orbit. The lunar module pilot (LMP) did an
The Earth Orbital Working Group was established excellent job of acquiring most of the lunar surface
to prepare plans for this alternative.
photography. Although the nighttime pass for
By launch time, a series of scientific tasks had astronomical photography was canceled because
been formulated and included in the flight plan. of crew fatigue, the command module pilot's
The instruments available for these scientific tasks (CMP) visual studies of an orbital sunrise were
were the following cameras and ancillary equip- of scientific value. A sunnnary of the proposed
ment carried in the command module: versus accomplished scientific tasks is shown in
1. One 16-mm Maurer data acquisition camera table 4-].
(primarily for operational sequence photography)
a. One 200-ram lens PHOTOGRAPHIC OBJECTIVES
b. One 75-ram lens
c. One 18-ram lens ROBERT O. HILL AND LEWIS C. WAI)V.
d. One 5-ram lens
Obtaining vertical and oblique overlapping
e. Nine magazines SO-368 color film (out- photographs on at let_st two orbits was a primary
door) photographic objective of the Apollo 8 mission.
f.
Two magazines SO-168 color film (high- The purpose of the overlapping, or stereoscopic
speed interior) strip, photography was to provide a means for
2. Two 70-nml Hasselblad electric cameras determining the positions of lunar far-side features
a. One 250-ram lens
in latitude, longitude, and elevation. The positions
b. Two 80-ram lenses
were to be determined with respect to the control
c. One magazine S0-121 color film (outdoor) points sighted with the sextant as a part of the
d. Two magazines SO-368 color film (out- lunar navigation task and with respect to seleno-
door) graphic control points on the front side established
e. Three magazines type 3400 black-and- from Lunar Orbiter and telescopic photography.
white film (Pan-X) The results of these studies are covered in chapter
f. One magazine type 2485 black-and-white 2. In addition, terminator-to-terminator photo-
film (high-speed) graphs were to provide a means for relating points
g. One red-blue filter holder on the eastern limb of the Moon to features in
h. One polarizing filter the Apollo landing zone. Additional information
105
BACKGROUND

TABLE 4 I.--Scientific Tasks Proposed for the Apollo 8 Mission

Accomplished
Proposed

Ai)proximaleIy 30 of planned lai'gels photographed.


Take piclures or photographic sequences of approxinmlely 50
targets of opportunity (of 185 targets identified, 50 were
opport.une for a l)ee. 21 launch).
Accomplished wi'_h excellent resuils.
Using intervalometer and brackeL photograph lunar lermim_tor
to terminator vertical stereoscopic strip.
Taken as vertical strip with black-and-white film and
Using intervalometer and bracket, phot(_graph lunar oblique
no stop changes; results enhanced I)y extel_de(t-ral_ge
stereoscopic strip with color film.
developing techniques.
Acc<)mplished.
Track and I)h(_t(_gral)h a lunar landmark, using rotation of
spacecraft for image motion coml)ensation.
Not attempted: however, surface detail visually dis-
Photograph lunar surface in earthshine.
tinguishable in both earthshine and Sun shadows.
None observed.
Observe and photograph transient lunar surface phenomena..
Not at teml/)ted.
Photograph zodiacal light ...............................
Nol attempled.
Photograph solar corona .................................
Not attempted.
Photograph gegenschein ................................. As t)redicted, spolmeter outI)tlt of limited value for
Use the spotmeter to verify preplanned lunar surface lens
lunar surface exposures because of narrow view angle.
exposure schedule.
Accomplished.
Obtain zero-ph&se-angle surface pitt ures ....................
Not attempted ulltil transearth injection; data un-
Red-blue surface study (use of dual filler holder to obtain
sat isfact ory.
evidence of color).
Not atlempled.
Take star-field photographs lo aid in wi,(tow contamination
studies.
Accomplished.
Obtain translunar and transearth pictures of Earth ...........
Accomplished.
Use high-speed film to determine total film radiation dosage
during the mission.
Crew exceptional on visual observations:
Visually search for the following geoh)gic phenomena:
I)ifferelLces in crater shapes and apparent ages
Anomalous crater shapes .............................
noted.
Area resembling volcanic flow noted.
Volcanic evidence ...................................
Possible faulting and collapsed w)lcanic pipes
Structure ..........................................
noted.
Looked for; none observed.
Transitory phenomena (light fl_hes, volcanic eruptions,
phosphorescence, etc.).
Visually search for the following dim-sky phenomena: through tracking
Sunrise phenomena o})served
Solar corona-zodiacal light ...........................
telescope.
Not.hing observed.
Gegenschein-Moulton point. ......................... ()ceultalions noted; no evidence of almost)here.
Atmosphere evidence by star occultation ..............
Looked for; not seen.
Visually search for evidence of lhe sunset horizon glow such as
first seen by Surveyor. Effects of rockel-motor operations and dumps noted.
Visually search for evidence of contamination ..............

20 ° from the vertical. The photographs were to be


that was to be obtained from this photography
taken at 20-second intervals with ,t shutter speed
included albedo data and an evaluation of near-
of 1/250 second. The vertical pass was scheduled
terminator topographic analysis capability.
on the fourth revolution, ht the flight plan, the
The areas to be covered by the stereoscopic
landmark evaluation exercise preempted the last.
strip photography were dependent on the day of
20 minutes of photography that would have per-
launch. The photography was to consist of one
mitted camera operation all the way to the
pass with the camera optical axis near vertical
near-side terminator.
and one pass with the camera optical axis inclined
106
ANALYSIS ()F APOLLO 8 PIIOTOGRAPIIY AND VISUAL ()BSERVATION.S

The convergent strip, using St) 368 color fihn,


rude; availability with Estar thin b_se; schedule(l
was sch(_(luled for the ninth revolution, q'he
use in the 16-ram camera, which made possible
camera wits to be started 6 nlinutes after the far-
the use of the same exposure settings with both
side ternfinator and wits to be ot),,ratod to approxi- 16-nml and 70-nnn camer_; and high recommen-
nmt(qy h_ngitu(le 60 ° E. In the flight t)lan, con-
(lation by personnel of the MSC Photographic
timfing the converg(q,t stereoscopic strip to t h(_
Technolog3- Lal)oratory. Film type SO-368 was
near-side t('rminat(w wits pre('ludod by television
scheduled for use during the ninth-revolution
activities scheduled for the ninth revolution.
stereoscopic strip photography and for a limited
()n bflt,]l passes, all extra exposure was to be
numl)er of targets of opportunity. In 'td(lition,
nmnu.dly triggered :q)proximately every 5 minutes
use of this emulsion was planned for operational
and the time of the exposure recor(led. Both
ph(,togr:q)hy of the S-IVB and fi)r Earth photo-
passes were to requir(, "t full magazine of fihn.
graphs. Two magazines of 70-ram 'tnd nine of
Photographic targets _)f opp(wtunity are those 16-nnn S()--368 were on board.
recomnwnde(l if time and circumstances permit
Kodak l)anat(mfic X aerial fihn, type 3400
their accomplishment. All hmar surface areas
(Estar thin base), is a t)anchromatic negative flint
where At)CIo 8 l)hotographic coverage was desired
that has high contrast and extended red sensi-
were plotted on -_ Target of Opportunity Phuming
tivity. The high "wutance and very high resolution
Chart. These recontn_ende(l targets were launch-
of this tilm fav(w a small-negative format. It is
day dependent. To determine which targets can
rated at 65 lines/nnn on 1.6:l contrast targets,
be photographed on a given launch date, it is
60 percent better than the resolution quoted by
necessary to determin(, the lunar lighting limits,
Kodak for Plus X aerial film, type 3401 (Estar
the orbital inclination, and the spacecraft attitude
thin bqse), which was also recommended.
during orbit. With these three basic parameters
The Panatomic X flint w_.s selected for the
anti by considering the position of the photog-
following reasons: (1) it possessed maximum reso-
rapher in the spaeecraft, targets were sequenced
lution consistent with lunar-surface exposure re-
by rev(,lution during lunqr ort)it. At the same
quirements, which indicated a shutter speed of
tin,e, e'tmera lens anti film combinations were
1/250 sccon(t to eliminate inmge motion; (2) it
deternfined. Changes in configuration of lens and
was "tvailable on Estar thin t)_se; (3) it yielded
fihn were kept to a minimunl by this method.
exposure values roughly consistent with other
To assist the crew, the data developed were selected emulsions; and (4) black-and-white film
printed on the Apollo Target of Opportunity
was preferred over color film for lunar photometric
Chart, which was carried on board the spacecraft. studies.
This chqrt also contained dat't for reeommende(t
The SO 121, slower speed, high-definition, color-
film ext)osures (f-stop changes); r(,gions to make
reversal film (Estar thin ba.se) was used quite
spotmeter measurements; special symbols for non-
suceessfully for the Apollo 6 strip photography.
sequenced targets, such as potential lunar tran-
Its adv'tntage over SO-368 is that it ha._ about
sient events; and all sul)plemental data required twice the r(_solution. The exposure latitude is not
to accomplish the reeomnlended photography. as great as that of SO-368; thus, it w_s not deemed
as desirable for lunar surface photography. The
NOTES ON FILM SELECTION
SO-121 film was carried on Al)ollo 8 because
AND USE
(1) it represents maximum resolution for color-
JAMES L. DRAGG AND ROBERT O. HILL reversal emulsions; (2) it w'_s primarily intended
for use in Earth orbit in the event that Apollo 8
Fihn type SO-368 has been used extensively remained th(,re; (3) it was available on Estar
during past manned missions for bottl 70-ram still
thin base; and (4) the exposures were consistent
•rod 16-ram sequence photography. Several factors with other onl)o'trd films.
entered into its selection for the hmar surface
Kodak 2485 high-speed recording film (Estar-
photography when a color emulsion was desired:
AH b.tse) is an extremely high-speed panchro-
past. experience it, exposing and processing, which
nmtie film with (,xten(led red sensitivity. It was
gave a high confidence level; wide exposure lati-
selected f,w th(, Apollo 8 mission for possible
BACKGROUND 107

photography of various astronomical phenomena increase that would be caused by this level of
(gegenschein, zodiacal light, stars, and solar radiation. The head and tail t)ortions of the re-
corona), the lunar surface in earthshine, an(l other turned flight fihn were developed "_t t h(_ NASA
low-light-level subjects. An emulsion with as high Manned Spacecraft Center by using the proce-
a speed as possible compatible with the pre(licted dures established t)rior to flight; namely, I)-19
radiation dosage, 0.5 rad, was required. The developer "_t 75 ° F for 12 minutes in a small tank.
Kodak 2485 film was selected primarily bec'_use The Hurter-Driffield curves of the flight and con-
of its high speed. Also, it w'_s availat)le on 4-rail trol film have been compared. The measure(l r't(li-
base (which proved to be comp._tible with the ation of approximately 0.2 rad simply raised the
Hasselblad thin-base fihn magazine), .tnd it ap- flight fihn calibration curve by 0.18 density. There
peared to be compatible with the radiation ex- was no appreciable effect oat the detectat)le thresh-
pected on Apolh) 8. old of the faintest calibration exposures.

USE OF TYPE 2485 FILM


CALIBRATION INFORMATION
L. DUNKELMAN AND ROBERT O. HILL
JAMES DAVIS AND ALAN WELLS

The fastest lens on board the spacecraft was


INTRODUCTION
the f/2.8 standard 80-nun lens used with the
Hasselblad camert_. While a lens of approximately This section presents manufacturing specifi-
f/1 would have been much more suitable, it was cations and tolerances, along with perforinance
determined from ground-based photography that parameters measured "_t the factory prior to de-
exposure times of 90 seconds woul(t be acceptable. livery, for the electric Ht_sselblad camera as-
This determination was nmde from (1) the results semblies. Some of the measured parameters were
of experiments in which daytime photographs of obtained from a typical lens; others were obtained
the faint dayglow and of stars were obtained with from the flight hardware. Some parameters were
type 2485 film from an Aerobec rocket, and (2) merely checked to insure conformity with toler-
determinations from ground-ba.sed photography ances, and the measured values were not recorded.
taken during clear, moonless nights at Greenbelt,
Md., and at Flagstaff, Ariz., of the region of the SPECIFICATIONS AND TOLERANCES
sky (Gemini and neighboring Milky Way) where
the antisolar point would be (luring the Apollo 8 Specifications and tolerances for the Planar
mission. f/2.8, 80-ram lens included the following:
1. Flange focal distance (FFD), 74.90_0.02
The flight film was precalibrated 3 days before
mln.
the launch of Apollo 8 by photographing, with the
2. Calibrated focal length (CFL), 79.9+0.8
flight camera, a calibrated nine-step gray target,
nlln.
the luminance of which ranged from 1X 10 -_3 to
3. Relative aperture, f/2.8 (+ 3 percent).
1X10 -u of the brightness of the solar surface.
The faintest portions of the gray scale included 4. Average spectral transmittance over the
luminances well below that of the gegenschein range 400 to 700 millimicrons, 80 percent mini-
in order to provide for quantitative analysis of mum.
the most critical of the possible astronomical 5. Fiehl of view, 37.9 ° side and 51.8 ° diagonal.
observational tasks. 6. Relative illumination at 22 ° field angle at
full aperture, 35 percent minimum; at fill, 75
During the planning stage for Apollo 8, a calcu-
lation based on the predicted radiation environ- percent minimum.
7. Sine-wave modulation transfer factors
ment for the December 21, 1968, launch gave
0.5 rad as an upper limit. The energy spectrum (MTF) at 20 cycles/mm, full aperture (mean
indicated that more than 99 percent of the radi- between tangential and radial image elements),
ation would consist of energetic protons. Film minimum on axis, 0.50; minimum at 22 °, 0.35.
Aperture tolerances are shown in table 4-II,
data produced by the manufacturer of type 2485
and nominal versus effective exposure times for
film indicated 0.4 as the upper limit of density
108 ANALYSIS ()1; AP()LLO 8 PIIOTOGRAPltY AND VL'-;UAI. OBSERVATIONS

TABLE 4-II.--P/anar f/2.8, 80-ram Lens Figure 4 3 shows the relative illumination
Aperture Tolerances curve for this lens. The curve for f/11 resembles
the cosine 4 degeneration curve, but it is generally
f-slop I':quiwtlent (.ir(.ular diameler, mm slightly higher. The curve shown for f/2.8 shouhl
be the composite curve of cosine * degeneration
and vignetting effects. Information for the curves
2.8 ........ 21.20 (=t=5 percent)
4 ..........
at the other relative apertures w_s not supplied
14.99 ( +12.25 per(.e,I, - 10.56 percent)
5.6 ......... by the nmnufacturer. If there is no vignetting,
10.60 ( + 12.25 t)erce,t, -- 10.56 percent)
7.5[) ( + 12.25 per('erll, -- 10.56 pereenl) 100
11 ........ 5.30 ( + 12.25 percent, -- 10.56 percenl)
16 .......... :{.75 ( + 12.25 t)ercelit, -- 10.56 percent)
oo
2.65 ( ÷ 14.90 l)er'('eiH, -- 12.83 per(.em )

5o
TABLE 4-III.--P/anar f/2.8, 80-mm Lens Shutter E

i--
Nominal exposure _ime, Effective expo.sure time,
I 1 J
sec nlsec a
300 4O0 5O0 60O 700
Wavelength, nan0meters

1/51)() 2.15
l;[_;uaE -1--2. -Spectral transmittancc curve for Planar lens,
1 I251} 4.11
SIN 4289861.
l/125 8.01
1/60 15.83
1 t30 31.50

1 t]5 62.70

125.2

_4 250.2

V2 500.2
1 1001). 2

=t=10 percent.
Ol; , , I
the between-the-lens shutter are given in table o lo 2o 3o 4o
4-III. Image displacement, mm

No specific tolerance infornmtion is available


FmURE -t-3.--Relative illumination curve for Planar lens,
for the Sonnar f/5.6, 250-ram lens, but it pro- S/N 4289861.
rides three times more magnification than the
80-ram lens; has relative apertures of .1"/5.6, 120
f/8, fill, f/16, f/22, f/32, and f/45; has the x 1_11
c i00
same type shutter as the 80-ram lens; and has
_o
a field of view of 12.5 ° side and 17.6 ° diagonal. _ 80

MEASUREMENTS FROM A TYPICAL LENS

The following information is based on measure-


4o
ments using 't Planar .1"/2.8, 80-ram lens, serial
number (S/N) 4289861, and must be considered 2o
the best available to date since measurements of ¢1)
I I I I
these parameters were not m:t(te on the flight 10 20 30 40

lenses. Figure 4-2 shows the spectral transmit- Image displacement, mm

tance curve for this lens. No information is


FI(_UEtE .t-4. Effective area of entrance pupil in percent
available concerning me'tsurement method or
of the entr.tnce pupil on ._xis for Planar lens, S/N
accuracy. 4289861.
10(,)
BACKGROUNI)

})y llW:i,sUl'elllelit hmc('uraci('N in ()})t:dning the


the curve for fill applies also t() the other un-
f/11 curve of figure 4 3.
vignetted apertures.
It shouh| be pointed out that, in figure 4 4, St)ecifi(_ations and (()It,faRces for ihe 1)In,mr
.f/2.g. (g()-mm lens, S/N 4499000. in('lud(' a (!FI,
the f/ll curve is above 100 percent for most
of its length. As an experinwnt, the c()sine 4 curve
was divided into each of the curves of figure 180' B
C I
4-3 in succession. The results agree with the
curves of figure 4 4. This indi('ate._ that figure
4-4 m'ly have been generMed in this maturer.
If so, the values above 100 percent are caused

TABLE 4-IV.--Exposure Times for Compur


Shutter S/N 177

Nominal exposure time, Effective exposure lime,

see
ITl,_e C a 62 65 64

2.31
I /5(}0
4.1g
1/25O
l /125
g. 02
15.66
l/60
28.96
1/:_0
57.gl

130.4
.14
250.9
14 A O
496.9

1 923.0 FIt_unE 4-6.--Sine w'_w_ MTI: at 20 eyeles mm for radial


image components, percent, for Planar lens, S,N
4489000.
Average of 10 releases.

181Y' B
C
l_' B

30 3W

.... 50/" _ 57

/" ,,,
" < '/ " " "I "'II "ii ::i
' / , ,gq ',
! r [ 6fi 1
, I 62/ "_ 67 ,,' ,' ,

,,' ,,,'
,,, '\ M_ 6....

'3 - 3 ..... "5_. // / _ / ...................

A 0
O"
F{(_URE 4-7.---Sine wave MTF at 20 cyeies/nm_ for tan-
FIGURE 4-5.--Distortion _( relative to PPA for f, 2.8, view
gential inmge elements, percent, for Plan'tr lens, S N
from rear, positive direction away from center, for
4489000.
Planar lens, S'N 4489000.
110
ANALYSIS (}F AI'OLLO 8 PIIOTOGRAPHY AND VI,_,UAL ()BSEItVATIONS

of 79.87+0.08 ram. For distortion relative to


field positions is given in figures 4-6 and 4-7.
the principal point of autoeollimation (PPA),
Nominal versus effective exposure times for
see figure 4-5. S"
, me-wave MTF at the spatial
the Compur CS-1210-722 shutter, S,/N 177,
frequency of 20 cycles/toni for various image are given in table 4-IV.

The CFL of the Planar f/2.8, 80-ram lens is


180°
C f 79.95__+0.08 ram. For distortion relative to the
PPA for full "tperture, see figure 4-8. Sine-wave
MTF at 20 cycles/nun for various imt_ge field
_-192 40 00/B
positions is given in figures 4-9 an(t 4-10.
"" _ 30 \2

TABLE 4-V.--Exposure Times for Compur


Shutter S/N 175

/ 75 10 /4 ' "'.... Nominal exposm'e time, Effective exposure time,


sec
Inset •
I i i I
i 74/",,,78
I/'5o0 2.33
_89_/_......._6 r/25(I 4.05
, .... ,
................ l /125

1/60
7.95

.... C
15.41
I/30 28.04
1/15 55.48
'-200 -196" ....... 122.4
V, 250.8
A I D 505.4
0_ 1 928.0

FIGURE 4-8.--Distortion _, relative to PPA for f/2.8, view


" Average ,)f 1(1releases.
from rear, positive direction away from center, for
Planar lens, S/N 4488999.

C 180'
I C 180' B
\ ,o /'
\ /
\ 31 30 29 //
E

60 57 60
[, 5/_5 7'_31 ,,]

/ N
/ N
/ N
/ N

A
/ , \
0 O

FIGURE 4-9.--Sine wave MTF at 20 cycles, mm for radial


FmuaE 4-10.--Sine wave MTF at 20 eycles/mm for
image components, percent, for Planar lens, S/N
4488999. tangential image components, percent, for Planar lens,
S_N 4488999.
BACKGROUND 111

For nominalversuseffectiveexposuretimes SPECTRAL TRANSMITTANCE OF THE

for the CompurCS-1210-722 shutter,S/N 175, LENS/WINDOW COMBINATION


seetable4-V. Figure 4-11 shows the relationship of the
electric Hasselblad camer'l to the spacecraft
window when the camera is installe(t in the
bracket. The spectral transmission of the window
varies with the incidence ,ingle of the impinging
light. Spectral transmittance curves for the
window are available for incidence 'ingles 0°
and 45 °. The spectral transmitt'ulce curve for
the c.mler't lens, on-axis, is available. Spectral
transnfittance of the lens, oif-axis, can be obtained

,,, 1 .;Vertical by nmltiplying the on-axis curve I)y the relative


illumination factor for the desired off-axis angle
(field angle). The sl)ectral transmittance of the
lens/window system is shown in figure 4-12 for
window inci(lence angles 0 ° and 45 °. Data are
being obtained for window transmission at each
A 5 °. The condition of 0 ° incidence on the st)ace-
Horizontal _ A_A_'//_30_
craft window results in the formation of the

image at point A in the fihn format (fig. 4-11(b)).


'_,,,Windownormal The corresponding lens field angle is 18 °. in the
s.ime way, a 30 ° angle of incidence at the win(low

(a) .... Cameraoptical axis


.8-
0 incidence and
18 field angle
.7

., 55 mm .6

.5

g
j_ r*_f Z 45 ,nci@_c:_nd
.4
Lr,
E I]31 21 field angle
I
A C B
.3

.2

J
!
I
I
I
I' I I I
(b) -,---26 mm--.-,..-.,,-I7mm-,,. 300 400 500 600 ?00
Waveleng|h, nanometers
FIGURE 4-11.--Relationship of bracket-installed Hassel-
blad camera to spacecraft window. (a) Configuration, Fz(_utt_: ,t-12.--Transmission versus wavelength for
(b) resulting image formation. lens window combination (80-mm focal lengt h, f,11 ).
l 12 ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPttY AND VISUAL ()BSERVATIONS

produces -tn image at point B, at 12 ° field tingle. metric strip is to reconstruct the density (D)
The on-axis image point C is fornm(t by light at versus exposure (E) relationship (D log E or
an 18 ° angle of inci¢teuce on the window. Hurter-Driffieht--H and D--curve) which per-
For all the points just discussed, the window tains to the specific l)rocessing chemistry, temper-
incidence angle and the lens fiehl angle are both ature, and processing time for the flight fihn and
in the same plane. The plane also contains the subsequent duplication printing. Contingencies
c'tmera ot)tical axis and is mutually perpendicular alh)wing for lunar photography, Earth photogra-
to the window "rod t,o the fihn phme. phy, anti lunar photography with the red (29) and
For t)()inls to either side of line A B in fgure blue (47B) filters were considere(t in establishing
4 11(b), ea('h of the two angles is in a different sensitometric requirements for Apollo 8 fihn
t)hme; and the solution for the locus of l)oints in types 3400, 2485, SO-121, and S0-368.
the film phme which satisfies the same conditions The spectral distribution of light reflected
as, for examl)le, point B, is "t complex problenl from the Moon was approximated by addition
in geomct W. F()r points in the corners of the of filters nos. 80A and 82 to the 2850 ° K sensi-
fornmt near point B, the window incidence angle tometer illuminant to convert to an approximately
approaches 45 ° . 4750 ° K source. Daylight sensitometry was
('omnmn points which satisfy given conditions provided by application of a Corning 5900
occur in pairs, symmetrical about line A B. A filter to the sensitometer illuminant: to convert
correction matrix couht be fornte(l for one-half to a color temperature of approximately 5600 ° K.
of the image format, which is valid for the other Sensitoinetric strips with red and blue filters
half if nlirrore(|. However, each point in the utilized the 4750 ° K source. No provision w_Ls
matrix is unique, requiring the solution of a made for the spectral transmission of the camera
different complex geometrical problem, involving lens and spacecraft window. However, all sensito-
compound "ingles, for each point. To obtain a metric exposures used a Wratten 2B filter to
suitable density of points in the correction matrix simulate the cutoff of the spacecraft window.
wouht require a large number of computations. Sensitometry was performed through a carbon
step wedge of 21 steps. Values for the steps
FILM SENSITOMETRIC
T_,BLE 4-VI.--Density of Carbon Step Wedge
CALIBRATION

JAMES L. DRAGG Step Density

The Apollo S photography affords the first t) ......................................... 0


ot)portunity for analyses of the intensity and .15
spectral distribution of hmar scene light free from .33
modulation caused by atmospheric effects (Earth .48
4 ........................................ .62
telescopic photography) and by electronic trans-
.77
mission 'rod reconstruction (Ranger, Surveyor, .93
and Lunar Orhiter). To t)rovide for these analyses, 7 ......................................... 1.08
a series of sensitometric strips was exposed onto 1.24
1.38
the flight fihn mid relate(I fihn, alh)wing the
10 ........................................ 1.54
extraction of quantitative information relating
11 ........................................ 1.70
fihn densitometric measures to exposure values. [2 ........................................ 1.86
Assistance in establishing the sensitonmtric 13 ........................................ 2.00
requirements w'ts t)rovided by the MS(; Photo- 14 ....................................... 2.16
2.34
graphic. Technoh)gy I,at)oratory, which also pro-
16 ....................................... 2.49
vided for the placement of the scnsitometry
]7 ....................................... 2.65
and subsequent original negative fihn measure- 2.81
ments "rod h._s been of valuable assistance to 19 ...................................... 2.9g
sensitonmtric analyses. 20 ...................................... 3.14
The prinut W fullctitm of "t ('alibration sensito-
BACKGROUND 1 13

arc listed ill tM)le 4-VI. Actual sensitomctry m-tgazines (', D, and E have been supplied by
the Photogr'q)hic Technology l.aboratory. Some
applied to the fihns was as indicate<l in table 4-
comparative results (D log E curves) are shown
VII.
Provision was made for head-versus-tail, pre- in figures 4-13, 4 14, and 4-15.
The differences observed between sensitometric
mission-versus-postnfission, and stored-versus-
strips "m(l control strips in figure 4-14 are
flight-fihn comparisons of sensitometry at 4750 °
K. 8ensitometrie (t'tta (m original negatives for larger than wouhl be expected. However, all

TABLE 4-VII.--Magazine Sensitometric Strips

When Fillers Absolute log E,


Magazines Strip Where
no. exposed exposed step 11

I t|ead Premiss(on ROA, g2, 2B ,2.82


A and F .............................. .2.87
2 Head Premiss(on C59(}0, 2B
3 Tail Post mission 80A, 82, 2B '2.82
l llead Post mission g0A, 82, 2B '2.82
Premiss(on 80A, 82, 2B 2,.82
2 Head
3 It cad Premissioh C59(}0, 2B ,2.87
Postmission 80A, 82, 2B ,2.82
1 Head
C and E ............................ '2.45
2 llead Premisslon 80A, 82, 2B, 47B
eremissmn 80A, 82, 2B, 29 _.75
3 ttead
Premissmn 80A, 82, 2B _.s2
4 ttead
Premissum C5900, 2B _.87
5 ltead
Postmissmn 80A, 82, 2B .82
I) ...................................
1 tlead
Premission 8()A, 82, 2B, 47B 2.45
2 Head
Premissmn g0A, £2, 2B, 29 _.75
3 tlead
Premission 80A, 82, 2B 2.82
4 tlead
Premissu>n C5900, 2B _.87
5 Head
P,'emissum 80A, g2, 2B _.s2
6 Tail

2.6 2.6
2.4 5ensitometric strip 4 (head) ..... ._f
2.4 PostmJssionexposed(strip II ,,,/
2.2 Sensilometric strip 6 (tai I) -.__ _/""
22 Premission exposed,he Id // "
2.0
2.0- at MSC, processed with [light film ,,_/_ _ Process control strip Ileader) --//
1.8- 1.8
Process control // /
1 6 /" Premissbn 1.6
' _ /// exposed(strip 4} 1.4
/1 co 1.2
1.0
u-1. 0
strip (t_

-ii 6 .4
.2 2 Absolute log E
,4_1 I 1[ I I I I I I J
0 .6 .8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2
Relative log E
Relative Log E
FIGURE 4-14.--D log E curves for Apollo 8 magazine D
FIGURE 4-13.--D log E curves for Apollo 8 magazine E original negative, comparing sensitometric strips and
original negative. process control strips.
114
ANALYSIS OF APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPIIY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

2.6
camera-pointing orientations: vertical, east and
west oblique on groundtrack, and north and
2.2 south oblique off track.
2.0
2.4 / Computing the exposures (f-stops) involved
Sensitometricstrip no. 4 two operations:
1.8 Moonlioh! simulation //
>_1.6 Filters _OA,82, 2B., // 1. Prediction of the average value and range

/
of the film-plane illumination (exposure) for
each condition of solar illumination/viewing
geometry and surface albedo to be encountered.
_-1.0 2. Evaluation of the sensitivity of each film
.8 // "'-Sensitometri¢strip no. 5 type to the predicted illumination and subse-
.6 // Daylightsimulation quent selection of the appropriate camera set-
.4 //. CS_Ofilter +2B ting required to achieve the optimum exposure
at the film plane.
.2 _ .- 2.82absolutelogE A matrix of exposure values was generated
...,_ I t : rl I J , I I I J j
0 .-8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2 that accounted for all possible combinations of
RelaliveIo9E camera/scene conditions. These conditions were
treated as E=STtpch/4p, where E is the ex-
FI(;URE 4-15.--D log E curves for Apollo 8 magazine D posure in meter-candle-seconds (m-cd-s), S is
original negative.
the average solar illumination at the surface
in meter-candles (m-cd), T is the percent
transnfittance of the lens and spacecraft window,
results have not yet been received, and analyses t is the shutter speed in seconds, p is the surface
are continuing. The use of the premission ex-
albe(lo, _ is the lunar photometric function, and
posures with 80A, 82, and 2B filtem are cur-
f is the relative aperture. Values used for Apollo
rently recommended for photometric reductions.
8 were 14X104 na-cd for S, 0.747 for T, and
0.004 second for t. The relative aperture was
CAMERA EXPOSURE
varNble, with full stops from .1"/2.8 to f/16. The
CALCULATIONS
percent of albedo p varied from 0.05 to 0.25,
GEORGE R. BLACKMAN
and _ varied from 0 to 1.0.
For each scheduled photographic target, the
The relative aperture settings were determined
solar illumination/viewing geometry was com-
preflight for use with the 70-ram fihn types
puted for entry into the lunar photometric func-
and were applicable for tile 80-ram lens, and tion (fig. 4-16), and the albedo noted from
for the 250-nun lens up to and including the existing data. Since albedo data were not
.1"/5.6 aperture, which is the largest that can be
available for the lunar back side, those
used. These data were printed on the photo- values were derived through the correla-
graphic Target of Opportunity Chart with the
tion of brightness measurements from front-
f-stop changes indicated as a function of seleno-
and far-side Lunar Orbiter photography and
graphic longitude. Although underexposures were
controlled to the existing albedo data applicable
expected near the terminators, it wa._ decided
to the front side. By referring to the locations
that the shutter rate should remain fixed at
of these two values in the matrix (photometric
1/250 second. At slower shutter speeds, loss of
function and albedo), the predicted film planc
image resolution could be expecte(t because of
exposure could be determined for each of the
image smear. With the wide latitude inherent
c.Lmera stops (f/2.8 to f/16). The next step was
in the film types selected, adequate exposure to decide which of these f-stops silould be used
control could be m'tintained with aperture regu-
for each particular scene as dictated by the
lation only.
s(msitivity of the specified fihn type.
Three sets of f-stop changes were recom-
The fihn response (sensitivity) to the incident
mended to correspond t() ea<.h of the general
exposure was derived through analysis of plots
BACKGROUND 115

1.0F g =0 5

i .6 30

.4 60

°
•2 I0_
120

I
lOO
0 80 60 40 _0 0 20 40 60
{a) Luminance longitude, , deg

/a=O

• 10

0 i I I
-180 -160 -140 -120 100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 1OO
(b) Phaseangle, g, deg

FI(:UI_E -1-16. l'l_otomet 'ie flmetion. (a) _ versu._ a (JPI,), (b) 4_ versus g (JPI,).

to provide the adequate tolerance necessary to


of density D versus tile logarithm of the expo-
record all surface detail in any one scene, de-
sure (D log E curves) resulting from the con-
trolled exposure and processing of calibr'ded pendent only on the provision that a suitable
minimum level of intensity entere(l the system.
sensitometric strips on the same fihn types to
Four stops for the 3400 (black and white) fihn and
be used (luring the mission (figs. 4-17 to 4-19).
SO-12I color film and five stops for the S0-
The analysis for each fihn type was conducted
368 color film were found to be the latitude
as follows. First, it was (tetermined that the
r,mges of the films. Consequently, the f-stop
range of exposure that could be expected from
selected for a given scene couhl be off by :_ much
a given lunar scene woul(1 not exceed 21/_
,_s one full stop on either the 3400 or SO-121
stops. The 1,ditudes of the flint types were found
I 16 ANALYSIS (W APOLLO 8 PHOTOGRAPItY AND VISUAL OBSERVATIONS

3,0 - inflection point between overexposure and under-


2.8[
exposure. Again, if the appropriate f-stop is
chosen, this value could be correlated to the
2.4 •tverage brightness of the lunar scene (nddseene
2.2 exposure). The log E midscene values determined
2.0 for each of the films are 2.89 for SO-368, [.00
_1.8 for SO-121, and 1.19 for 3400.
The f-stops were selected by relating back
"_ 1.41- /..-Midscene to the eOml)uted exposure matrix and treating
the scheduled photograt)hic targets individually.

.8 / /,Optimum exposure
The
exposure
sele('te(l
values
f-stops
nearest
were
to those
those that
of the
represented
midscene

°r ! I ,"; : Midpoints
values derived for the specified fihn type.

.4_- / I ,'/ ,," or f'stops


3.6

..... 59 2.89 i. 19 i.49 1.79 0.o9 _.39 3.2


LogE, rncs

FI(:URI-: .1-17. D log E [_urve for 3400 film. 2.8

films or by 11/_ stops on the S() 368 film and still 2.4

suitably record all the information within the


scene. _'2.0

The next step was to decide, within the range


E
of exposures to which the fihn is sensitive, the __1.6 ..Midscene
exposure value which most closely defined the
1.2

3.2 --
.8
Optimum exposure,

2.8 .4 Midpoints of f stops, ",,\


I I \
I I ',
2.Zl o L ! II II I I 1 i I
;. 39 3.99 2.59 ).89 i.19 i.79 0.39
Log E, mcs
2.0
F1(_um.: 4-19.--D log E curve for SO-368 film.
_1.6
.--'" Midscene
E
For the vertical and ontrack oblique stereo-
iT
1.2 scopie strips, the midscene exposures progressed
as a symmetrical curve of near-zero value at
the terminators and increased to maximum
.8
value at that point on the groundtrack nearest
Optimum exposure, the subsolar point. Only differences in the sur-
.4
Midpoints of f stops-. ", face albedo caused local fluctuations in the

I I smooth progression of the curve. For those cases,


0 1 I I I I I I ' I I I I I I I
3.39 determining the f-stop change points was
3.99 2.59 1.19 i. 79 D.39
straightforward and considerably more accurate
Log E, mcs
than was the case with the targets of opportunity
FIGURE 4-18.---D log E curve for SO-121 film. (north 'rod south obliques).
BACKGROUND 1 17

Albedo

0.22 0.20 O. 18 0.16


11

ll

O8

0.06

-- 34O0

-- -- SO-t21,
S0-368

2.8
L._ J
.4 .5 .6
0
Photometric function

FIGURE 4-20.--Exposure matrix.

The stops for the targets of opportunity were existed where, oil one revolution, a target close
calculated in essentially the same manner. Un- to the groundtrack required an .(/8 exposure;
fortunately, it is not possible to compile one set and, on a later revolution, a target some distance
of exposure-change points that would apply off track, but at approximately the same longi-
to all targets north and south of the ground- tude, would require an f/2.8 exposure. For cases
track. Extreme differences in scene brightness of this nature, an intermediate stop was chosen
occur when the camera pointing angles are in biased toward the more important of the two

any plane other than one that is approximately targets. Dependence was made on the wide
latitude of the film to salvage the greater part
parallel to the plane containing the solar illu-
mination vector and the subsolar point. This is of each of the two images.
especially critical within the region bounded by The capability was established for providing
+ 35 ° of longitude from the subsolar point. Some f-stop values in real time by translating the
compromise had to be made. Many instances exposure matrix into a graph (fig. 4-20) and
t 1_ ANALYSIN _)l," APOLL() ,_ PfIC.TOGIiAPIIY ANI) VISUAl, OI]SF, I{VAT|ONS

instituting techniques f.r _[etermining the scene s('amfiug each |'rame I with a McBeth TD 102
geometry from 1:5 00(I 000-scale m-q)s. The f- densitometer for minimum, maximum (exclusive
stop change locations were superilnpose<l on the of shadow), and average visual diffuse densities.
graph; and, consequently, the appropriate selec- The :tver:lg(, was taken of six points (listribute(l
tion could be determined directly as a function _v('r lhe frame. The maximum was generally
of the photometric functi,m 'rod "dbedo that llC"tl" ()IIC' ()f _][1(' fralllo (!oFIlers where lens trailS-
applied to any given target. Procedurt,s were mission was h'ast. All densities are correlated for
established and simuhttcd for revising the entire rehdive exposure against the preexposed sensito-
SC'¢ of exposure l'('COlllllliql_[a(,iOllS _htfff were on
metric strip, approxim,_ting a 4750 ° K source
the flight chart if "m .ff-nomin:d situation should with :t Wratten 2B filter. ('.orrelation against the
[)CC/II'.
original negative was l)erformed 1)y reference
EXPOSURE EVALUATIONS _<) sen._iiometric curves supplied t)y the Photo-
JAMES L. DRAGG AND HAROLD L. PRIOR gral)hic Technol,_gy l;tboratory.

Questions have "u'isen from Apollo 8 as to Magazine C


whether multiph, aperture settings are required
Magazine () includes the second, or forward-
and whether high- or low-gamm,_ processing is
looking, pass of the stereoscopic strip photogra-
desired. To investigate these alternatives and
l)hy in which a real-time decision was made by
also to evaluate the exp<)sures ol)taine<t, a task
the Apolh) 8 crew to bracket-mount the camera
was initiated to examine the exposures of maga-
and expose at a constant aperture of f/5.6. To
zines C, D, and E. All three magazines are
type 3400 black-an(t-white film. Second-genera-
l l']arlh, full-Mo<)n, and low-ho,'izon ])hoh_graphs were
tion m'rster positives were obtained for the
n(d evahmled. Also, several fr,tmes of magazine E were
evaluation. Each magazine was evaluated by too dense [m the pt)sitive for evahm_ion.

2.50

16
15

14

2. O0 13
Sensitometric

steps

,\;axh,_um density 12

_=2.0
I. 50 0. t5 Io9 E steps
11
g
Ave
E
density --

lO
1. O0

""Minimum

density

.5O

6
5

0 I i I 1
2651 I
2675 2700 2725 27.50
2825
Frame number

FI(;t:RE -t-21. I)ensity versus frttiile number for Apollo 8 m,'tgttzine C master positive.
ItACK(_ROL'NI) t 19
2.50
alhnv for the deviatiml fl'om phume, l multiph'
aperttlrt' set, tings and provide maximtnn t)I'.ba-
bility
Te('hnld()gy
for ilnag_'
I,al)oratory
rev(w(,rs',
(hwialed
the
front
Phol()p;raphic
the phttme(t 2.00 i
\ P, aHor l)os tb. e

high-gamma processing and pro('css('(t this mag-


.o
4:)
azine at low gamma. The den4ty plots of maga- e,J

zine (' are shown in figure 4 21. A shift in D-max _1.50


occurred at the termination of the stereoscopic C
oJ

strip at frame 2740. Discounting shadow, all K


o
but the first few near-terminator frames are well i,00 ×
o
exposed. Correlation to the original negative
(fig. 4-22) shows ,dl fi'ames from 2667 to 2807
c
are recovered on essentially lhe "straight line"
•5O
portion of tho curve. The lllaXilllUlll t,xpostlres
of all fraines are well recorded, and two full stops
J
and possibly more" were available on the linear-
0 ___ L_.
16 id

Siq_s 40.15 log L relativel


l)ala froln the Photographic Technology I,aboraH_ry

indicate a zelulively straight-line-p,n'_i,m usefulness up

to a density of aboul 2.1 on the original, (_r a total of about FII_UI¢.I'; i 22 l)ensilv versus steps for Apollo 8
10 stops.
magazine C

3. O0

-2._1-4+- 5.6 _ -- -S- _ 11 _r_ :S -_t_5._ i<ecmmi>nde<l v,_rticalsettings

_. ).7, + 4 _ 5.0 _---8- _}_--11---_- 8 _--_--5.6 _ ReCOlmnendedcolor 308

. /; _ %0-.._1;12_ 5.0 8 _ ..... 11 ---_---_8 _ 112 -_"_5.{'_ -- Apparent


5O
8

..... IlSd×i..i Nnl dpn t,!l,_

2. O0
/ _ 9 i0

c 1.50
¢,

E
A_,eraq_/_

1.O0

/ Y_ 1.75
•5O
4 0.]5 log steo',
7 2
o__,, I

2025 2050 2075 2100 2125 21'50 2175 2200


Frame number

l;'zt;t:ttE 1 2:/. l)ensily versus frame numbm' fro' .._,p, dlo g magazine 1) master tmsilive.
120 ANALYSIS ()F APOIJA) _ PIIt)T()t;IIAPIIY ANI) VISUAL ()IiSEI{VATI()NS

response portion of tile curve "tt the maximum locati()ns sl)ecifie(I for the reconmlende(t forward-
exposure end. It is noted th'tt all of tile imagery h)oking c()lor fihn (S()-368) pass as opposed to
fell into a relative log E range ()f 1.65, ()r 'd)out the rec(mmlende([ vertical 3400 tress, which was
5.5 stops, and also that 75 percent of the imagery exercised. The excelltion was in the change from
fell within a relative log E rang(, of ().8, or about f/l 1 1()f/S, which occurred a._ recommended. The
2.7 stops. Therefore, it is conclude(t that this rccomzuemte(I ('hange from f/8 to f/5.6 occurred
magazine couhl have be(,n exposed at either at the ,_:tme location for both and was apparently
f/4 or f/2.8 and have m'dntain(,d linear response exercised a._ rc('()mnmnde(l. It is also apparent
at the maximum exposure end. This, (hen, might thai half-_top apertures were used. The "q)er-
have t)roduced a beneficial effect (m the near- tures s]mwn in figure 4-23 are the apparent ones
terminator t)hotogr'q)hy. use(l, although absolute exposure uncertainty
migh( _hift all apparent st()t)s potentially as
Magazine l)
'l unit t)y up t,) one ,_top. Assuming the apparent
Magazine D includes the vcrtic'd stereoscopic al)ertllres ;t.re correct, an a(ljustnmnt has been

strip pass and wa_ ])rocesse(l at high gamma "it- •q)t)li(,d '_ for each frame to place it at the
cording to premission t)lanifing. The high-gamma i)l'mne(t exposure level._, as shown in figure 4-24.
processing was t)rincipally t)lanncd to accom- Note thai the exposllres are llOW Illore uIliform,
mo(tate the planned re(l-t)lue tilter photographs with lhu I)rimary exception being the .1"/11 se-
where very ._mall expo._ure (tifferen(:e._ were to quence. A dclit)erate t>ias was planned for this
be measure(I and correl'm'(I. The ])h)t (fig. 4- sequence, which in(dudes zero-l)hase photography,
23) of the densities of magazine I) reveals several to insure t)r,)t)(,r (,xposuro of zero t)hase (in view
interesting factor_. Correl'ttion of verified at)er-
lure changes to the missi()n re'q) gives cle,lr evi-
3 No v,,rr(,(.lion has been applied resulling from changes
dence that aperture changes were mad(, at in l(,n_ Irau_mi,-_ion_ al different apertures.

Planned apertures
8 11 8 5.6
2.50 2.8 _1, '_ *t, 5.6 .b H. .I,

11
,,,_ _ximumdensity
2. O0
10

9
itometric
1.50

E
7_
1.00

.... f_,i'_
i FIi I_1LIrtl density

•5O

0 -N,, I L I 1 L J
2025" 2050 2075 2100 2125 2150 2175 2200
Frame number

FIGUIiE 4-24. Apolh) 8 magazine D nmster t)ositiv(, (,xt),)sures c()rr(,e((,(I to reflect phtnned ap(,rtures.
BACKGROUND 121

uf uncertainties in the photometric function at. 2.50 Master positive /

zero phase) and to allow for potentially high Originalnegative _

albedos oil the lunar far side. No degradation


in the imagery occurred "_ a result of the aper- 2.00
tures used, however, and all frames (except near-
ternfinator frames) are adequately recorded in
the linear-response portion of the fihn, its in(li- _1.50 _i _i %1 / _I -_I

cated in figure 4-25. To eonipare the effect of _i _ ,,_

magazine D viewing geometry against magazine oI oI